Bridge Command BC-MT-2450 Installation guide

Bridge Command BC-MT-2450 Installation guide
Servo Controller / Drive
Installation Guide
d
Cm t
ue in
rq Po
ToTest
RP 240
RS 232
Rx
Tx
Gnd
Iso
V
+5
Gnd
Iso Rx
Tx
ield
d
Cm t
ue in
rq Po
ToTest
EX
61
COM 2
Tx
COM 1
Gnd
Iso
V
+5
Gnd
Iso Rx
Tx
ield
Sh
External Encoder Input
ield
Sh
Gnd
Iso Z -
et
Offs e
lanc
Ba
t
pu
Out n
ch ratio
Ta lib
Ca
le
ab
En ble
sa
Di ult
Fa t
idge ul
Br e Fault
iv
Fa
Dr
or ge
MotVolta it
r Lim
Ove I2T ult
n Fa e
ge tiv
Re n Ac
ge
Re
Z+
-
t
se
Re
Gnd
A+
V
+5
Gnd
Iso
me
Ho
g
Ne
s
Po
NC
In
le
ab
En Out
ult
Fa
Gnd
NC
NC
Out
ch
Ta
Gnd
ield
-15V
Encoder Output
x-P
Au
ield
Sh
Gnd
Z
Iso
Z+
B
B+
-
A+
V
+5
Cos
Sin
Ref
et
Res
Gnd
NC
In
le
ab
En Out
t
ul
Fa Gnd
NC
Gnd
Iso me
Ho
g
Ne
s
Po
2
1
Re
Gnd
NC
In
le
ab
En Out
t
ul
Fa Gnd
NC
NC
I–
Out
AN
A
gTr
B
gTr
-A
Out
Gnd
V
+5
-P
Out
-P
In
P
xAu
2
1
ch
Gnd
5V
+1
Gnd
5V
-1
Ta
A+
CH A
CH
B+
CH B
CH
Z+
CH
ZCH
Gnd
ield
Sh
d
Re
k
Bl
S1
S2
Grn
u
Bl
n
Br
ht
W
l
R2
Ye
MT+ rg
O
MT- y+
la
Re Flt lay
Re
Flt
NC
S3
S4
R1
NC
50
49
A+
CH A
CH
B+
CH B
CH
Z+
CH
ZCH
Gnd
k
Bl
Grn
u
Bl
n
Br
ht
W
T+
M
T
M
lay+
Re
Flt lay
Re
Flt
NC
NC
50
49
Compumotor Division
Parker Hannifin Corporation
p/n 88-016148-01 A March 1997
Ta
A+
CH A
CH
B+
CH B
CH
Z+
CH
ZCH
Gnd
ield
Sh
d
Re
t
I+
Iso
NC
Out
ch
Gnd
5V
+1
Gnd
5V
-1
I–
AN
A
gTr
B
gTr
-A
Out
Gnd
V
+5
-P
Out
-P
In
P
xAu
Iso
se
ield
Sh d
Re
2
1
s
Po
A
5V
+1
Gnd
I+
AN
I-
AN
A
gTr
B
gTr
-A
Out
Gnd
Iso
V
+5
-P
Out
In-P
Gnd
Iso me
Ho
g
Ne
AN
et
e
Offs
lanc
Ba
t
pun
Outtio
ch ra
Ta lib
Ca
le
ab
En ble
sa
Di ult
Fa t
ge ul
id
Br ive Fault
Fa
Dr
or
ge
Mot Volta it
m
r
Li
Ove I 2 T ult
Fa e
n
tiv
ge
Re n Ac
ge
Re
Auxiliary
Tx
AN
B
B+
A
External Encoder Input
51
d
Cm t
ue in
rq Po
ToTest
Limits
AP
Rx
A+
V
Encoder Output
Gnd
Iso
V
+5
Gnd
Iso Rx
Sh
or
mot
pu
Com
B+
-
A
S1
k
Bl
S2 rn
G
S3
u
Bl
S4
n
Br
R1 ht
W
l
R2
Ye
MT+ rg
O
MT- y+
la
Re Flt lay
Re
Flt
NC
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
RP 240
L2
Auxiliary
ol
Z+
-
B
+5
I+
Encoder Output
L1
ntr
Co
ield
Sh
Gnd
Z
Iso
et
Offsce
an
Bal
t
pun
Outtio
ch ra
Ta alib
C
le
ab
En le
ab
Dis ult
Fa t
ge ul
Fa
rid
B
e ult
Driv Fa
or
ge
Mot Volta it
m
r
Li
Ove I 2 T ult
Fa
en ive
Reg Act
en
Reg
Tx
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
ol
ntr
Co
Limits
E
G
R
A
O
LT
rth
Ea
V
G
H
N
IG
H
A
E
rth
Ea
Auxiliary
rth
Ea
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
L2
RS 232
Rx
L1
Limits
External Encoder Input
Sh
D
Compumotor
APEX615n
NC
50
49
User Information
!
WARNING
!
6000 Series products are used to control electrical and mechanical
components of motion control systems. You should test your motion
system for safety under all potential conditions. Failure to do so can result
in damage to equipment and/or serious injury to personnel.
6000 Series products and the information in this user guide are the proprietary property of Parker Hannifin Corporation or its licensers, and
may not be copied, disclosed, or used for any purpose not expressly authorized by the owner thereof.
Since Parker Hannifin constantly strives to improve all of its products, we reserve the right to change this user guide and software and
hardware mentioned therein at any time without notice.
In no event will the provider of the equipment be liable for any incidental, consequential, or special damages of any kind or nature
whatsoever, including but not limited to lost profits arising from or in any way connected with the use of the equipment or this user guide.
© 1995-7, Parker Hannifin Corporation
All Rights Reserved
Motion Architect is a registered trademark of Parker Hannifin Corporation.
Motion Builder, CompuCAM and DDE6000 are trademarks of Parker Hannifin Corporation.
Microsoft and MS-DOS are registered trademarks, and Windows, DDE and NetDDE are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Motion Toolbox is a trademark of Snider Consultants, Inc.
LabVIEW is a registered trademark of National Instruments Corporation.
Technical Assistance
Contact your local automation technology center (ATC) or distributor, or ...
North America and Asia:
Europe (non-German speaking):
Germany, Austria, Switzerland:
Compumotor Division of Parker Hannifin
5500 Business Park Drive
Rohnert Park, CA 94928
Telephone: (800) 358-9070 or (707) 584-7558
Fax: (707) 584-3793
FaxBack: (800) 936-6939 or (707) 586-8586
BBS: (707) 584-4059
e-mail: [email protected]
Internet: http://www.compumotor.com
Parker Digiplan
21 Balena Close
Poole, Dorset
England BH17 7DX
Telephone: +44 (0)1202 69 9000
Fax: +44 (0)1202 69 5750
HAUSER Elektronik GmbH
Postfach: 77607-1720
Robert-Bosch-Str. 22
D-77656 Offenburg
Telephone: +49 (0)781 509-0
Fax: +49 (0)781 509-176
Product Feedback Welcome
Motion & Control
E-mail: [email protected]
ABO UT
Chapter
1.
THIS
Installation
What You Should Have (ship kit) ........................................................... 2
Before You Begin ..................................................................................... 3
Recommended Installation Process ............................................. 3
Electrical Noise Guidelines ........................................................... 3
General Specifications ............................................................................ 4
Pre-installation Adjustments................................................................... 6
DIP Switch Settings ....................................................................... 6
Changing from RS-232 to RS-485 .............................................. 10
Mounting the APEX615n........................................................................ 11
Installation Precautions ................................................................ 11
Dimensions................................................................................... 12
Airflow & Cooling.......................................................................... 14
Panel Layout.................................................................................. 14
Electrical Connections .......................................................................... 16
Ground Connections..................................................................... 18
AC Input Connector ...................................................................... 21
Serial Communication ................................................................. 25
External Encoder .......................................................................... 26
End-of-Travel and Home Limit Inputs......................................... 27
Trigger Inputs................................................................................ 28
General-Purpose Prog. Inputs & Outputs.................................... 29
RP240 Remote Operator Panel................................................... 32
Lengthening I/O Cables ................................................................ 33
Drive Auxiliary Connector ........................................................... 34
Encoder Output Connector........................................................... 37
Resolver Connector ..................................................................... 40
Connecting the Motor ................................................................... 45
Testing the Installation........................................................................... 46
Mounting & Coupling the Motor ............................................................ 49
Mounting the Motor....................................................................... 49
GUIDE
Motor Heatsinking ........................................................................ 56
Coupling the Motor ....................................................................... 56
What's Next? ......................................................................................... 58
Program Your Motion Control Functions.................................... 58
Chapter
2.
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Basics......................................................................... 60
Diagnostic LEDs for Hardware Problems.................................. 60
Reducing Electrical Noise ........................................................... 62
Error Messages and Debug Tools .............................................. 62
Technical Support......................................................................... 62
Common Problems & Solutions........................................................... 63
Troubleshooting Serial Communication Problems............................. 65
Faults Caused by Excessive Regeneration......................................... 66
Regen Fault................................................................................... 66
Overvoltage Fault ......................................................................... 67
Current Foldback (I2T Limit)................................................................ 68
Offset Balance Adjustments.................................................................. 69
Tachometer Output Calibration ............................................................ 70
Aligning the Resolver ............................................................................ 70
Commutation Test Mode ...................................................................... 71
Returning the APEX615n....................................................................... 71
Appendix A (Servo Tuning)............................................. 73
Appendix B (Reducing Elec. Noise) ........................ 91
Appendix C (Motor Specifications).......................... 95
Appendix D (LVD Installation) ................................... 109
Appendix E (EMC Installation Guide) .................. 113
Appendix F (DIP Switches)........................................... 121
Appendix G (Regeneration Resistors) ................ 127
I n d e x ................................................................................................ 133
Purpose of This Guide
This document is designed to help you install and troubleshoot your APEX615n hardware
system. Programming related issues are covered in the 6000 Series Programmer's Guide and
the 6000 Series Software Reference.
“APEX615n” Synonymous with “615n”
The APEX615n product is often referred to the as the “615n” because it is part of the 6000
family of products. The APEX615n's software and the 6000 Series software documentation
(e.g., 6000 Series Software Reference) refer to this product as the “615n.”
What You Should Know
To install and troubleshoot the APEX615n, you should have a fundamental understanding of:
• Electronics concepts, such as voltage, current, switches.
• Mechanical motion control concepts, such as inertia, torque, velocity, distance, force.
• Serial communication and terminal emulator experience: RS-232C and/or RS-485
Related Publication
• 6000 Series Software Reference, Parker Hannifin Corporation, Compumotor Division;
part number 88-012966-01
• 6000 Series Programmer’s Guide, Parker Hannifin Corporation, Compumotor Division;
part number 88-014540-01
• Current Parker Compumotor Motion Control Catalog
• Schram, Peter (editor). The National Electric Code Handbook (Third Edition). Quincy,
MA: National Fire Protection Association
Online Manuals This manual (in Acrobat PDF format) is available from our web site: http://www.compumotor.com
APEX615n CONTROLLER/DRIVE: LVD Installation Instructions
Product Type: APEX6151, APEX6152 and APEX6154 Servo Controller/Drives
The above products are in compliance with the requirements of directives
• 72/23/EEC
Low Voltage Directive
• 93/68/EEC
CE Marking Directive
APEX615n Controller/Drives, when installed according to the procedures in the main body of
this installation guide, may not necessarily comply with the Low Voltage Directive (LVD) of
the European Community. To install an APEX615n Controller/Drive so that it complies with
LVD, you must follow the additional procedures described in Appendix D, under LVD
Installation Instructions. If you do not follow these instructions, the protection of the product
may be impaired.
The APEX615n Series of Controller/Drives are sold as complex components to professional
assemblers. As components, they are not required to be compliant with Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC. However, information is offered in Appendix E on how
to install these drives in a manner most likely to minimize the effects of controller and drive
emissions and to maximize the immunity of controllers and drives from externally generated
interference.
ii
APEX615n Installation Guide
1
CHAP T E R ONE
Installation
IN THIS CHAPTER
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Product ship kit list
Things to consider before you install the APEX615n
General specifications table
Optional pre-installation alterations
- DIP switch settings – motor current, device address, autobaud feature
- Changing the COM 2 port from RS-232C to RS-485
Mounting the APEX615n
Connecting all electrical components (includes specifications)
Testing the installation
Motor mounting and coupling guidelines
Preparing for what to do next
What You Should Have (ship kit)
Part Name
If an item is missing,
call the factory (see
phone numbers on
inside front cover).
Part Number
One of the following line items:
APEX615n standard product (with ship kit) ............................................................... APEX615n
APEX615n standard product (with ship kit) ............................................................... APEX615n
APEX615n standard product (with ship kit) ............................................................... APEX615n
The part number will say APEX6151, APEX6152, or APEX6154, depending on which
version you ordered.
Ship kit:
3-pin Plug (one included: COM 1 connector)............................................ 43-009055-01
5-pin Plug (one included: COM 2 connector)............................................ 43-005561-01
9-pin Plug (one included: Ext. Encoder Input connector).......................... 43-008755-01
4-pin Plug (one included: Limits connector).............................................. 43-005560-01
11-pin Plug (one included: Auxiliary connector) ......................................... 43-008885-01
13-pin Plug (two included: Drive Aux. and Resolver connectors)............. 43-013802-01
7-pin Plug (one included: Encoder Output connector) .............................. 43-013801-01
7-pin Plug (one included: Power connector) ............................................. 43-013575-01
8-pin Plug (one included; Motor connector) .............................................. 43-014533-01
Cable, Jumper (2 included, for AC power connector) .................................. 71-015237-01
22 AWG, .2" c/c, Yellow (4 included, Jumper Wires) ................................... 44-011061-01
22 AWG, .8" c/c, White (1 included, Jumper Wire)....................................... 44-015830-01
This installation guide (APEX615n Installation Guide)................................... 88-016148-01
6000 Series Software Reference .................................................................... 88-012966-01
6000 Series Programmer’s Guide .................................................................. 88-014540-01
Motion Architect diskettes:
Disk 1........................................................ 95-013070-01
Disk 2........................................................ 95-013070-02
Options/Accessories
Part Number
APEX Series Motor (brushless motor with resolver)................................APEX602-MO, APEX603-MO
Motor Cable:
(For APEX602, APEX603 Motors).................................71-013863-xx
Resolver Cable (For APEX602, APEX603 Motors).................................71-013862-xx
Resolver Cable (For APEX602, APEX603 with brake) ...........................71-014082-xx
SM Series Motor (brushless motor with resolver)....................................SM-231AR, SM-232AR, SM-233BR
Resolver Cable (for SM-231AR, SM-232AR, SM-233BR) ....................71-015019-yy
Motor Cable:
(for SM-231AR, SM-232AR, SM-233BR) ....................71-015078-yy
Cable Kit:
(Resolver & Motor Cables for SM-23 motors)......................23RS CABLE-10, 23RS CABLE-25
NOTES: Cable lengths, represented by “xx,” can be NC (no cable), 25, 50, or 100 feet.
Cable lengths, represented by “yy,” can be 10 or 25 feet.
2
APEX615n Installation Guide
Before You Begin
WARNINGS
The APEX615n is used to control your system's electrical and mechanical components.
Therefore, you should test your system for safety under all potential conditions. Failure to do
so can result in damage to equipment and/or serious injury to personnel.
Always remove power to the APEX615n before:
• Connecting any electrical device (e.g., motor, encoder, inputs, outputs, etc.)
• Adjusting the DIP switches, jumpers, or other internal components
Recommended Installation Process
This chapter is
organized
sequentially to best
approximate a typical
installation process.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Review the general specifications
Perform configuration/adjustments (if necessary)
Mount the APEX615n
Connect all electrical system components
Test the installation
Mount the motor and couple the load
Tune the APEX615n servo controller.
Program your motion control functions. Programming instructions are provided in the
6000 Programmer's Guide and the 6000 Software Reference. We recommend using the
programming tools provided in Motion Architect for Windows (found in your ship kit).
You can also benefit from an optional iconic programming interface called Motion Builder
(sold separately).
Electrical Noise Guidelines
•
•
•
•
Do not route high-voltage wires and low-level signals in the same conduit.
Ensure that all components are properly grounded.
Ensure that all wiring is properly shielded.
Noise suppression guidelines for I/O cables are provided on page 33 and in Appendix B.
Chapter 1. Installation
3
General Specifications
P a r a me t e r
S pe c if ic a t ion
Input Power
Voltage Range...........................................................APEX6151: 85-252VAC (1-phase)
APEX6152: 205-252 VAC (1- or 3- phase)
APEX6154: 205-252 VAC (1- or 3- phase)
Frequency Range .....................................................47-66 Hz
Current (max. cont.).................................................APEX6151: 14A (rms) at 120 VAC; 10A (rms) at 240 VAC
APEX6152: 8A (rms) 3- phase
APEX6154: 15A (rms) 3- phase
Power (max. cont.)...................................................APEX6151: 2.4 KVA
APEX6152: 3.3 KVA
APEX6154: 6.2 KVA
Fuses.........................................................................No internal fuses. Recommended external fuse:**
APEX6151: 120 VAC Operation: 25A slow blow (Littelfuse #326-025 or equivalent)
240 VAC Operation: 15A slow blow (Littelfuse #326-015 or equivalent)
APEX6152: 12A slow blow (Littelfuse #326-012 or equivalent)
APEX6154: 20A slow blow (Littelfuse #326-020 or equivalent)
Isolation Transformer...............................................Not required
*For operation from single phase power, derate system performance according to motor
size and total system performance.
**The actual input power and current is a function of the motor's operating point (speed and
torque) and the duty cycle. You can de-rate the fuses by scaling the above numbers by your
actual requirements. The numbers above reflect the servo motor and drive operating at
rated speed and rated torque at 100% duty.
Output Power
Voltage ......................................................................APEX6151:
APEX6152:
APEX6154:
Frequency .................................................................APEX6151:
APEX6152:
APEX6154:
Current (max. cont.).................................................APEX6151:
170-340 VDC (nominal), 420 VDC (maximum)
340 VDC (nominal), 420 VDC (maximum)
340 VDC (nominal), 420 VDC (maximum)
0-400 Hz fundamental (15 KHz PWM)
0-400 Hz fundamental (8 KHz PWM)
0-400 Hz fundamental (8 KHz PWM)
8A continuous per phase sinusoidal (5.66A rms)
16A peak per phase sinusoidal (11.31A rms)
APEX6152: 12A continuous per phase sinusoidal (8.5A rms)
24A peak per phase sinusoidal (17.0A rms)
APEX6154: 20A continuous per phase sinusoidal (14.14A rms)
40A peak per phase sinusoidal (28.3A rms)
Environmental
Operating Temperature ...........................................32 to 122°F (0 to 50°C)
Storage Temperature ...............................................-22 to 185°F (-30 to 85°C)
Humidity....................................................................0 to 95% non-condensing
Performance
Position Range..........................................................±2,147,483,648 steps
Velocity Range..........................................................0.001-200 counts/sec
Acceleration Range ..................................................0.001-999.9999 units/sec2
Velocity Repeatability ..............................................±0.02% of set rate
Velocity Accuracy ....................................................±0.02% of maximum rate
PositionalRepeatability ............................................±0.088 degrees, unloaded
Positional Accuracy .................................................Resolver Accuracy: ±10 arc minutes
Resolver-to-Digital Converter Accuracy: ±10 arc minutes
Positional Resoluton.................................................Resolver-to-Digital Converter Resolution: 4096 counts/rev
Motion Trajectory Update Period ............................Default is 1.7 ms (depends on SSFR value)
Servo Sampling Update Period ...............................Default is 400 µs (depends on SSFR value)
System Update Period .............................................Default is 1.7 ms (depends on SSFR value)
4
APEX615n Installation Guide
Serial Communication
RS-485 requires internal jumper and DIP switch configuration (see page 10).
Connection Options.................................................. RS-232C (3-wire); RS-485 (2- or 4-wire);
Change internal switches SW1, SW2, and SW3, and internal jumper JU2 to position 3 to
select RS-485 communication for COM 2 port..
Default for RS-485 is 2-wire. Change internal switch SW3 to select 4-wire.
Maximum units in daisy-chain or multi-drop......... 99 (use ADDR command to set individual addresses for each unit)
Communication Parameters................................... 9600 baud , 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity;
RS-232: Full or half duplex; RS-485: Half duplex (see page 10)
Inputs
ALL INPUTS ARE OPTICALLY ISOLATED**
Home, POS/NEG Limits ........................................ Switching voltage levels based on V_I/O*; internal 6.8 KΩ pull-ups to AUX-P terminal
(connect AUX-P to +5V or external power supply to source current or connect AUX-P to ISO
GND to sink current); voltage range is 0-24V.
Encoder..................................................................... Differential comparator accepts two-phase quadrature incremental encoders with
differential (recommended) or single-ended outputs.
Maximum voltage = 5VDC. Switching levels (TTL-compatible): Low ≤ 0.4V, High ≥ 2.4V.
Maximum frequency = 1.2 MHz. Minimum time between transitions = 833 ns.
16 General-Purpose Programmable ..................... HCMOS compatible* with internal 6.8 KΩ pull-ups to IN-P terminal (connect IN-P to +5V to
source current or connect IN-P to Iso GND to sink current). Voltage range = 0-24V.
Triggers: TRG-A and TRG-B ............................... Switching voltage levels based on V_I/O*; internal 6.8 KΩ pull-ups to AUX-P terminal
(connect AUX-P to +5V or external power supply to source current or connect AUX-P to Iso
GND to sink current); voltage range is 0-24V.
Outputs
ALL OUTPUTS ARE OPTICALLY ISOLATED***
9 Programmable (includes OUT-A)......................... Open collector output with 4.7 KΩ pull-ups. Can be pulled up by connecting OUT-P to +5V,
or to user-supplied voltage of up to 24V. Max. voltage in the OFF state (not sinking
current) = 24V, max. current in the ON state (sinking) = 300mA.
Includes the 8 general-purpose outputs on the Programmable I/O connector, and the OUT-A
terminal on the I/O connector.
+5V Output
+5V terminals are available on the COM2, ENCODER, AUXILIARY and I/O connectors. Load
limit (total load for all I/O connections) is 100mA.
Weights
Unit Weight................................................................... APEX6151:
APEX6152:
APEX6154:
Shipping Weight.......................................................... APEX6151:
APEX6152:
APEX6154:
*
**
***
10.7 lbs. (4.9 kg)
16.6 lbs. (7.6 kg)
21.5 lbs. (9.8 kg)
18 lbs. (8.2 kg)
25 lbs. (11.4 kg)
30 lbs. (13.7 kg)
Switching voltage levels for HOM, POS, NEG, TRG-A , TRG-B are based on V_I/O input voltage level:
Low ≤ 1/3 (V_I/O) volts, High ≥ 2/3 (V_I/O) volts.
HCMOS-compatible voltage levels (low ≤ 1.00V, high ≥ 3.25V).
Inputs and outputs are optically isolated from the internal microprocessor, but not isolated from other inputs or outputs.
Chapter 1. Installation
5
Pre-installation Adjustments
DIP Switch Settings – Motor Current, Feedback Options, Drive Features
The APEX615n has three 8-position DIP switches. The switches are located behind a small
metal cover on top of the APEX615n. Loosen the two screws that hold the access cover.
Move the cover out of the way to expose the DIP switches.
L1
L1
Earth
Control L2
Control L2
1
OFF
OFF
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW1 8 1 SW2 8 1 SW3 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Control L1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Earth
Control L1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Earth
Earth
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D A N G E R
Earth
HIGH VOLTAGE
L2
Earth
SW1 8 1 SW2 8 1 SW3 8
D A N G E R
HIGH VOLTAGE
L2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ControlL2
8
SW3
1
8
SW2
1
8
Off 1 SW1
Earth
ControlL1
L3
Earth
L2
L1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ControlL2
Off 1 SW1
8
1
SW2
8
1
SW3
8
Earth
ControlL1
Earth
D A N G E R
HIGH
VOLTAGE
L3
D A N G E R
HIGH
VOLTAGE
L2
L1
APEX6151 DIP Switch Location, with Cover Closed and Open
APEX6152/6154 DIP Switch Location, with Cover Closed and Open
The default setting for all DIP switches when the APEX615n ships from the factory is off.
You must set these switches to configure the drive for your particular application. Use a small
screwdriver to set the switches. The next section summarizes the function of each switch. See
Appendix F for additional description of DIP switch functions.
6
APEX615n Installation Guide
OFF
SW 1
1
APEX6151
DIPs
8
SW 2
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
ON
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3
7
8
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW 1
1
APEX602
8
1
8
1
1
2
3
4
5
8
6
SW 2
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
SW 2
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
2
3
4
5
8
6
SW 3
2
3
4
5
7
8
6
7
8
8
SW 3
1
1
2
OFF
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
6
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
7
8
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
2
3
OFF
ON
4
OFF
ON
(All APEX & SM motors)
5
OFF
ON
6
7
8
OFF OFF OFF
OFF
6
7
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
8
5
5
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
8
1
8
1
SW 2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
8
1
SW 1
1
APEX603
SW 1
SM232A
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
8
1
1
3
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
1
RESERVED
Off
ALIGNMENT MODE
No
Yes
COMMUTATION TEST MODE
No
Yes
HALL SELECT
Resolver Mode
(All APEX & SM motors)
Hall Mode
TACH SCALING
One speed resolver (1V = 1,000 RPM with a one speed resolver)
Two speed resolver (1V = 1,000 RPM with a two speed resolver)
RESERVED
All Off
SM231A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
1 2
CONTINUOUS CURRENT (peak of sine wave)
1.8 amps
OFF OFF
2.6
OFF OFF
3.4
(SM231A, SM232A)
OFF ON
4.0
(APEX603)
OFF ON
5.0
ON OFF
6.0
(APEX602, SM233B)
ON OFF
7.0
ON ON
8.0
ON ON
PEAK CURRENT
6.5 amps
(SM231A, SM232A, SM233B – initial values for tuning)
7.5
9.5
(SM231A, SM232A)
11.0
12.5
14.0
(APEX603)
15.0
16.0
(APEX602)
(SM233B)
MOTOR THERMAL TIME CONSTANT
10 minutes
(APEX602)
20
(APEX603)
30
(SM231A, SM232A)
40
(SM233B)
SW 1
8
2
OFF
ON
4 5
POLE PAIR NUMBER
2
(All SM; 602 & 603)
OFF OFF
3
OFF ON
Reserved
ON OFF
Reserved
ON ON
6
RESOLVER SPEED
1
(All APEX & SM motors)
OFF
2
ON
CURRENT LOOP COMPENSATION (motor inductance)
with 120VAC Input:
with 240VAC Input:
1 – 2 mH (SM233B)
Not Applicable
2 – 5 mH (SM231A, 232A)
5 – 20 mH (602)
5 – 60 mH (602, 603)
20 – 60 mH (603)
Reserved
1
SW 3
1
1
REGEN FAULT
Enable
Disable
HALL DEGREES
120° Hall motor
60° Hall motor
RESERVED
Off
OFF
8
1
2
3
4
SW 3
2
3
4
5
5
8
6
7
8
6
7
8
1
8
1
OFF
SW 2
2
3
4
6
7
SW 1
1
1
5
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
8
1
SW 3
2
8
1
8
1
3
4
8
5
6
7
8
SW 2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
8
1
SW 3
2
3
4
5
8
6
7
8
SM233B
DEFAULT SETTINGS: The default setting for all DIP switches
when the APEX6151 ships from the factory is OFF.
Chapter 1. Installation
7
OFF
SW 1
1
APEX6152
DIPs
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
ON
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3
OFF
25 – 40 mH (APEX605,606)
5 – 15 mH (APEX604)
15 – 25 mH
Reserved
7
8
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
CONTINUOUS CURRENT (peak of sine wave)
3.0 amps
4.2
5.4
6.6
7.8
(APEX605, 606)
9.0
(APEX604)
10.2
12.0
PEAK CURRENT
9.0 amps
10.8
13.2
15.0
17.4
19.2
21.6
24.0
(APEX604, 605, 606)
MOTOR THERMAL TIME CONSTANT
10 minutes
(APEX604, 605, 606)
20
30
40
RESERVED
Off
ALIGNMENT MODE
No
Yes
COMMUTATION TEST MODE
No
Yes
HALL SELECT
Resolver Mode
(APEX604, 605, 606)
Hall Mode
TACH SCALING
One speed resolver (1V = 1,000 RPM with a one speed resolver)
Two speed resolver (1V = 1,000 RPM with a two speed resolver)
RESERVED
All Off
SW 1
1
1
2
3
4
5
8
6
7
8
SW 2
1
1
2
3
4
5
8
6
7
8
SW 3
1
1
2
3
4
5
8
6
7
8
1
2
3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
4
5
6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
7
8
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
1
OFF
APEX615n Installation Guide
2
OFF
ON
3
OFF
ON
4
OFF
ON
(APEX604, 605, 606)
5
OFF
ON
6
7
8
OFF OFF OFF
OFF
APEX605
APEX606
SW 1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
8
1
SW 2
2
3
DEFAULT SETTINGS: The default setting for all DIP switches
when the APEX6152 ships from the factory is OFF..
8
SW 3
1
2
OFF
ON
4 5
POLE PAIR NUMBER
2
(APEX604; 605 & 606 )
OFF OFF
3
OFF ON
Reserved
ON OFF
Reserved
ON ON
6
RESOLVER SPEED
1
(APEX604; 605 & 606 )
OFF
2
ON
CURRENT LOOP COMPENSATION (motor inductance)
APEX604
8
1
REGEN FAULT
Enable
Disable
HALL DEGREES
120° Hall motor
60° Hall motor
RESERVED
Off
OFF
SW 2
1
4
5
6
7
8
1
8
1
SW 3
2
3
4
5
8
6
7
8
OFF
SW 1
1
APEX6154
DIPs
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF
ON
3
OFF
(APEX610)
(APEX620, 630, 635, 640)
7
8
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
1
2
3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
1
2
3
4
5
APEX610
6
7
8
1
8
1
SW 2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
8
1
SW 3
2
3
4
5
8
6
7
8
OFF
SW 1
1
1
2
3
4
5
APEX620
6
7
4
5
6
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
7
8
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
1
RESERVED
Off
ALIGNMENT MODE
No
Yes
COMMUTATION TEST MODE
No
Yes
HALL SELECT
Resolver Mode
(All APEX Motors: 610 - 640)
Hall Mode
TACH SCALING
One speed resolver (1V = 1,000 RPM with a one speed resolver)
Two speed resolver (1V = 1,000 RPM with a two speed resolver)
RESERVED
All Off
SW 1
8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CONTINUOUS CURRENT (peak of sine wave)
5 amps
7
9
11
13
15
17
20
(APEX610 - 640)
PEAK CURRENT
15 amps
18
22
25
29
32
36
40
(APEX610 - 640)
MOTOR THERMAL TIME CONSTANT
10 minutes
20
(APEX610)
30
(APEX620, 630)
40
(APEX635, 640)
1
SW 3
1
2
OFF
ON
4 5
POLE PAIR NUMBER
2
(APEX610 - 630)
OFF OFF
3
(APEX635, 640)
OFF ON
Reserved
ON OFF
Reserved
ON ON
6
RESOLVER SPEED
1
(All APEX Motors: 610 - 640)
OFF
2
ON
CURRENT LOOP COMPENSATION (motor inductance)
OFF
8
1
REGEN FAULT
Enable
Disable
HALL DEGREES
120° Hall motor
60° Hall motor
RESERVED
Off
25 – 40 mH
5 – 15 mH
15 – 25 mH
Reserved
SW 2
1
OFF
2
OFF
ON
3
OFF
ON
4
OFF
ON
(All APEX Motors: 610 - 640)
5
OFF
ON
6
7
8
OFF OFF OFF
8
1
8
1
SW 2
2
3
& APEX630
4
5
6
7
8
1
8
1
SW 3
2
3
4
5
8
6
7
8
OFF
SW 1
1
1
2
3
4
5
APEX635
6
7
8
1
8
1
SW 2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
8
1
SW 3
2
3
4
5
8
6
7
8
& APEX640
DEFAULT SETTINGS: The default setting for all DIP switches
when the APEX6154 ships from the factory is OFF..
Chapter 1. Installation
9
Changing the COM 2 Connector from RS-232 to RS-485
RS-232C Users
COM 2
Rx+
Rx–
Tx+
Tx–
Iso Gnd
+5V
Iso
Gnd
Rx
Tx
Shld
RS-232 (factory default)
RS-485 (optional)
1.
2.
The APEX615n's COM 2 port is factory configured for RS-232C
communication (use the right-hand pin descriptions). If you do
not need to use RS-485 communication, you may ignore this
section and proceed to the Mounting instructions.
Remove the four retainer screws
from the faceplate. Gently lift
away the faceplate .
Step 2 is only necessary for
the APEX6151. Skip to Step 3
for APEX6152 & 6154.
Be careful not to catch
the 50-pin header clips
on the faceplate.
Remove the four retainer
screws from the side panel, and
pull the panel away.
(two on the top of chassis,
two on the bottom of chassis)
3.
Set the jumper.
COM 2 port for RS-232: Leave JU2 set to position 1 (factory default).
COM 2 port for RS-485: Set jumper JU2 to position 3 on all units, as illustrated.
(disables power-up messages, error messages, & echo).
4.
Set the DIP switches. Switches and jumper shown configued for RS-485, 4-wire.
SW3
(Rocker-style switch — depress raised side of switch to change states. Shown in ON position.)
DIP switch #3: OFF= 2-wire, ON= 4-wire*
DIP switch #2: Turn ON for RS-485
DIP switch #1: Turn ON for RS-485
(Rocker-style switch — depress raised side of switch to change states. Shown in ON position.)
1
1
O 1 2 3 4
N
SW1
3
Rx Termination Resistor...........120 Ω
Tx+ Bias Resistor.....................681 Ω
Tx Termination Resistor...........120 Ω
Tx– Bias Resistor.....................681 Ω
2
DIP switch #4:
DIP switch #3:
DIP switch #2:
DIP switch #1:
JU2
3
SW3
3
SW1
2
SW2
1
SW2
DIP switch #3: Turn ON for RS-485
DIP switch #2: Turn ON for RS-485
DIP switch #1: Turn ON for RS-485
NOTE: Set the switches of SW1 to ON (as illustrated) to use the internal resistors. Typically do this for a single
unit or for the last unit in a multi-drop. If these resistor values are not appropriate for your application, set the
switches to OFF and connect your own external resistors. See page 25 for resistor calculations and wiring
instructions.
*4-wire = full duplex (transmit and receive at the same time); 2-wire = half-duplex (transmit or receive at any time);
5.
10
Reattach the side panel and faceplate and replace the retainer screws.
APEX615n Installation Guide
Mounting the APEX615n
Before you mount the APEX615n
Make sure you have performed all the necessary configuration tasks that require accessing internal
components (DIP switches and jumpers).
•
Select motor current (DIP switches). See pages 6-9.
•
Select serial communication method (jumper & DIP switches). If you are using RS-232C to communicate with the
APEX615n, use the factory settings. If you need to change these settings (i.e., for RS-485), refer to page 10 for instructions.
The APEX615n should be installed in an enclosure that will protect it from atmospheric
contaminants such as oil, metallic particles, moisture, and dirt. The National Electrical
Manufacturers Association (NEMA) has established standards that define the degree of
protection that electrical enclosures provide. Because industrial application environments may
contain airborne contaminants, the enclosure you use should, as a minimum, conform to a
NEMA TYPE 12 standard.
Installation Precautions
To ensure personal safety and long life of system components, pay special attention to the
following installation precautions.
Temperature
Internal
Temperature
Sensors
Humidity
Provide a minimum of 1 inch of unrestricted air-flow space around the APEX615n chassis.
The APEX615n will shut itself down if its internal sensor reaches 131°F (55°C).
• Maximum Ambient Temperature: 50°C (122° F)
• Minimum Ambient Temperature: 0°C (32° F)
The APEX615n has two temperature sensors. One is mounted on the drive board, near the
microprocessor. The other is mounted within the power bridge. If the internal temperature is
too high (perhaps because of blocked airflow, a fan that has stopped working, or external
ambient temperatures higher than 50°C (122°F)), one of these sensors will shut down the
drive. When the sensor on the drive board shuts down the drive, it also illuminates the Drive
Fault LED. When the sensor on the power bridge shuts down the drive, it illuminates the
Bridge Fault LED.
• Maximum Relative Humidity:
95% (non-condensing)
Liquids
Do not allow liquids or fluids to come into contact with the APEX615n or its cables.
Airborne
Contaminants
The APEX615n's fan provides internal forced air cooling whenever the drive is powered.
However, theAPEX615n does not have any type of intake air filter. Particulate
contaminants, especially electrically conductive material, such as metal shavings and grinding
dust, can damage the APEX615n and the APEX motor. You must protect the APEX615n's
intake air supply from contamination if you operate the drive in an environment where dust or
metallic particles are present, or where there may be airborne condensing moisture, solvents,
or lubricants.
Electrical Noise
Minimize the possibility of electrical noise problems before installing the APEX615n, rather
than attempting to solve such problems after installation. Prevent electrical noise problems
by observing the following guidelines:
• Do not route high-voltage wires and low-level signals in the same conduit.
• Ensure that all components are properly grounded.
• Ensure that all wiring is properly shielded.
Chapter 1. Installation
11
Mounting Slots and
Grounding
The APEX615n's mounting bracket is notched with keyhole type slots to accept four screws
for surface mounting on a flat panel. One of the slots—upper right—is unpainted. You can
use a star washer between the mounting screw and this slot to help provide additional electrical
grounding between the APEX615n and the mounting surface. The drive must also be grounded
through the Earth terminal on the AC power connector.
Dimensions
APEX6151
3.0
(76.2)
9.20 (233.7)
1.055
(26.8)
0.179
(4.55)
Unpainted
for
grounding
15.0
(381)
14.25
(362)
12.89
(327.4)
4x clearance
for #10 (M5)
mounting screw
1.50
(38.1)
12
APEX615n Installation Guide
0.75
(19.05)
APEX6152
10.750 (273)
1.000
(25.4)
0.33
(8.4)
4.500 (114.3)
2.000
(50.8)
1.250 (31.7)
A P E X 6 1 5 2
Unpainted
for
Grounding
14.250
(361.9)
15.375
(390.5)
16.250
(412.7)
Dimensions in
inches (millimeters)
4X clearance for
#10 (M5) mounting screw
APEX6154
10.750 (273)
1.000
(25.4)
5.875 (149.2)
3.000 (76.2)
0.33
(8.4)
1.438 (36.5)
A P E X 6 1 5 4
Unpainted
for
Grounding
14.250
(361.9)
15.375
(390.5)
16.250
(412.7)
4X clearance for
#10 (M5) mounting screw
Dimensions in
inches (millimeters)
Chapter 1. Installation
13
Airflow & Cooling
Airflow
a
E
rth
a
1
E
L
l
L
2
o
tr
l
n
o
o
tr
C
n
o
C
E
rth
a
rth
L
2
L
1
The APEX615n can operate in an
ambient temperature environment of 0°C
to 50°C (32°F to 122°F). It is cooled by
an internal fan mounted at the top of the
drive. The fan draws air in through the
bottom and upward over the internal
heatsink. The air directly beneath the
APEX615n must not exceed 50°C
(122°F).
HIGH A
N
VO G E
LT
AG R
E
D
AP
RS 232
Tx
d
Gn
61
51
d
Cm t
ue in
rq Po
ToTest
V
+5
d
Gn
Iso Rx
Tx
d
iel
Sh
d
iel
Sh d
Gn
External Encoder Input
RP 240
Iso
Iso
ZZ+
-
B
B+
-
A
A+
V
+5
Limits
d
Gn
Iso
me
Ho
g
Ne
s
Po
Auxiliary
APEX6151
AN
A
gTr
B
gTr
t-A
Ou
d
Gn
Iso
V
+5
t-P
Ou
In-P
x-P
Au
2
t
se
Re
d
Gn
NC
In
le
ab
En Out
ult d
Fa
Gn
NC
NC
t
Ou
ch d
Ta
Gn
5V
+1
d
Gn
-15V
A+
CH A
CH
B+
CH B
CH
Z+
CH
ZCH
d
Gn
d
iel
Sh d
Re
k
Bl
n
Gr
u
Bl
n
Br
ht
W
T+
M
T
M
+
lay
Re
Flt lay
Re
Flt
NC
Ref
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
Sin
Cos
1
fset
Of ce
lan
Ba
ut
tp
Ou n
ch ratio
Ta lib
Ca
le
ab
En ble
sa
Di ult
Fa t
idge Faul
t
Br
ive ul
Dr r Fa
ge
to
lta
Mo
it
Vo
er 2 Lim
Ov I T ult
n Fa e
ge tiv
Re n Ac
ge
Re
Encoder Output
Rx
I+
AN
I-
The APEX615n does not have an air
filter. You must protect its intake air
supply from contamination.
EX
or
mot
mpu
Co
NC
50
49
Airflow
Airflow
d
int
e Cm
rqu Po
ToTest
Rx
RS 232
d
Cm
ue int
rq Po
ToTest
Z
-
Z+
-
B
B+
-
A
d
Gn
me
Ho
W
CC
CW
NC
In
le
ab
t
En Ou
ult
Fa Gnd
NC
Auxiliary
2
1
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
APEX6152
5V
+1
d
Gn
A+
V
W
CC
CW
nd
AG
g-A
Tr
g-B
Tr t
Ou
d
Gn
V
+5
t-P
Ou
P
In-
V
-15
A+
CH A
CH
B+
CH B
CH
2
1
Z+
CH
ZCH
d
Gn
ield
Sh
d
Re
S1
Blk
S2
n
Gr
S3
Blu
S4
n
Br
t
R1
Wh
l
R2
+ Ye
MT
g
- Or
MT
+
lay
Re Flt lay
Re
Flt
NC
B+
-
A
+5
d
Gn
me
Ho
t
se
Re
d
Gn
NC
In
le
ab
t
En Ou
ult
Fa Gnd
NC
NC
t
Ou
ch d
Gn
5V
+1
d
Gn
V
-15
I
Ta
Encoder Output
t-P
Ou
P
In-
Z+
-
B
t
fse
Of ce
lan
Ba
t
tpu
Ou ion
ch rat
Ta lib
Ca
le
ab
En ble
sa
Di ult
e Fault
idg
Br ive Fault
Fa
Dr
ge
tor
Mo Volta it
er
Lim
Ov I 2 T ult
Fa e
n
tiv
ge
Re n Ac
ge
Re
AN
NC
t
Ou
ch d
Gn
I
AN
nd
AG
g-A
Tr
g-B
Tr t
Ou
d
Gn
V
+5
Limits
t
se
Re
d
Gn
A+
V
+5
Tx
d
iel
d
iel
Sh d
Gn
Z
Auxiliary
Limits
External Encoder Input
d
iel
Sh d
Gn
Tx
d
Gn
V
+5
d
Gn
Rx
Sh
External Encoder Input
Tx
d
iel
t
fse
Of ce
lan
Ba
t
tpu
Ou ion
ch rat
Ta lib
Ca
le
ab
En ble
sa
Di ult
e Fault
idg Fa
Br ive ult
Fa
Dr
ge
tor
Mo Volta it
er
Lim
Ov I 2 T ult
Fa e
n
tiv
ge
Re n Ac
ge
Re
APEX6154
Ta
Encoder Output
V
+5
d
Gn
Rx
Sh
RP 240
Tx
A+
CH A
CH
B+
CH B
CH
Z+
CH
ZCH
d
Gn
ield
Sh
d
Re
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
RP 240
RS 232
Rx
d
Gn
S1
S2
Blk
n
Gr
S3
Blu
S4
n
Br
t
R1
Wh
l
R2
+ Ye
MT
g
- Or
MT
+
lay
Re lay
Re
NC
Flt
Flt
NC
50
49
NC
50
49
r
oto
m
pu
om
r
oto
m
pu
om
Panel Layout
When designing the panel layout, remember that the APEX615n produces heat that must be
dissipated. Heat produced may be as high as:
• 100 watts for an APEX6151 operating continuously at 8 amps
• 150 watts for an APEX6152 operating continuously at 12 amps
• 200 watts for an APEX6154 operating continuously at 20 amps
The actual dissipation will vary depending on the application duty cycle, motor size, and load
inertia.
Panel layout dimensions are shown below.
14
APEX615n Installation Guide
1.50
(38.1)
(Minimum)
4.0 (102)
Clearance
(Minimum)
1.50
(38.1)
1.50 (38.1)
Clearance
(Minimum)
14.25
(362)
4.0 (102)
Clearance
(Minimum)
3.00 (76.2)
(Minimum)
4.50 (114)
Min
Clearance
When you design your panel layout,
follow these precautions for adequate
cooling:
• The vertical distance between the
APEX615n and other equipment, or the
top and bottom of the enclosure, should
be no less than 4 inches (100 mm).
• The horizontal distance between the
APEX6151's side air vents and other
equipment should be no less than 1.5
inches (38.1 mm). The horizontal
distance between the sides of the
APEX6152 or APEX6154 and other
equipment should be no less than 0.50
inches (12.7 mm).
• Do not mount the APEX615n directly
below heat-sensitive equipment.
• Large heat-producing equipment (such
as transformers) should not be mounted
directly beneath the APEX615n.
APEX6151
4.0 (102)
Clearance
(Minimum)
2.00
(50.8)
0.50 (12.7)
Minimum
A P E X 6 1 5 2
15.375
(390.5)
4.0 (102)
Clearance
(Minimum)
5.50 (138)
Min Clearance
APEX6152
A P E X 6 1 5 4
0.50 (12.7)
Clearance
(Minimum)
Compumotor
15.375
(390.5)
Compumotor
3.00 (76.2)
Minimum
3.00
(76.2)
0.50 (12.7)
Minimum
A P E X 6 1 5 4
A P E X 6 1 5 2
0.50 (12.7)
Clearance
(Minimum)
Compumotor
4.0 (102)
Clearance
(Minimum)
4.0 (102)
Clearance
(Minimum)
Compumotor
6.88 (162)
Min Clearance
3.38 (85.8)
Minimum
Dimensions in
inches (millimeters)
APEX6154
Chapter 1. Installation
15
Electrical Connections
AC Input Connector
DIP Switches
APEX6151
mp
um
EX
61
51
COM 1
Co
AP
r
o to
COM1
Compumotor
Rx
Torque Cmd
Test Point
Tx
Iso Gnd
COM2
Limits
External Encoder
Connector
EncoderOutput
Auxiliary
Sin Cos
Limits
Connector
Ref
ProgrammableInputs/Outputs
Iso
Rx- Gnd
Rx
Offset
Balance
Tx+
Tx-
Tx
Tach Output
Calibration
Iso Gnd Shld
COM 2
Connector
Auxiliary
Connector
External Encoder Input
External Encoder Input
COM 1
Connector
Limits
COM 2
Rx+ +5V
Shield
Iso Gnd
ZZ+
BB+
Enable
Disable
Bridge Fault
Drive Fault
Motor Fault
Over Voltage
I2T Limit
Regen Fault
Regen Active
AA+
Reset
+5V
Gnd
Iso Gnd
NC
Home
Enable In
Neg
Fault Out
Pos
Gnd
NC
ANI+
ANI Trg-A
Programmable
Inputs/Outputs
Connector
Auxiliary
Motor Connector
(Underneath Drive)
NC
Tach Out
Gnd
Trg-B
+15V
Out-A
Gnd
Iso Gnd
-15V
+5V
In-P
V_I/O
Test Points
1
COM 2
External Encoder Input
Connector Locations
16
APEX615n Installation Guide
EncoderOutput
Sin Cos
Encoder
Connector
Resolver
Connector
CHB+
CHB CHZ+
CHZ Gnd
Shield
Red
Grn
Blk
Blu
Brn
Wht
MT+
MT Flt Relay+
Flt Relay NC
49
Ref
ProgrammableInputs/Outputs
Auxiliary
Limits
Drive
Auxiliary
Connector
CHA -
Cos
LEDs
CHA+
Sin
r
Ref
o to
51
COM 1
C
um
61
Potentiometers
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
A
p
om
X
PE
2
Encoder Output
Out-P
Aux-P
50
NC
AC Input Connector
DIP Switches
COM
1
COM 1
Compumotor
2 T it
ILim
External Encoder Input
Tx
Torque Cmd
Test Point
Rx+ +5V
COM 2
COM 2
COM 1
Connector
Rx
Iso Gnd
COM 2
Connector
Iso
Rx- Gnd
Rx
Tx+
Tx-
Tx
Offset
Balance
Iso Gnd Shld
Limits
Tach Output
Calibration
Programmable
Inputs/Outputs
Limits
Connector
Auxiliary
Connector
Shield
External Encoder Input
EncoderOutput
Auxiliary
External Encoder
Connector
Iso Gnd
ZZ+
BB+
AA+
Enable
Disable
Bridge Fault
Drive Fault
Motor Fault
Over Voltage
I 2 T Limit
Regen Fault
Regen Active
+5V
Limits
Iso Gnd
NC
Enable In
ANI+
Fault Out
ANI–
Gnd
Trg-A
Auxiliary
Programmable
Inputs/Outputs
Connector
Gnd
Neg
Pos
Motor Connector
(Underneath Drive)
Reset
Home
NC
Trg-B
NC
Out-A
Tach Out
Iso Gnd
Gnd
+5V
+15 V
Out-P
Gnd
In-P
-15 V
Aux-P
Test Points
1
2
CHA CHB+
CHB CHZ+
CHZ -
Ref
Sin
Cos
Shield
Red
Blk
Grn
Blu
Brn
Wht
MT+
EncoderOutput
Auxiliary
Programmable
Inputs/Outputs
CHA+
Gnd
Limits
External Encoder Input
COM 2
COM 1
LEDs
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
Potentiometers
Encoder Output
V_I/O
Drive
Auxiliary
Connector
MTFlt Relay+
49 50
Flt Relay NC
NC
Encoder
Connector
Resolver
Connector
Connector Locations
Chapter 1. Installation
17
Ground Connections
The APEX615n has three internal ground systems: two floating ground systems (Isolated
Ground and Analog Ground) and one Earth ground system (Chassis Ground). The table below
identifies the terminals that are associated with each ground system. Refer to the following
drawings to locate the grounding points. Note that Pin 5 on the COM 2 port serves as Iso
GND when the port is used for RS-485 communication, and serves as Shield when the port is
used for RS-232 communications (default condition).
Ground System
Shared Terminals (internally connector to each other)
Isolated Ground.
Iso Gnd
All terminals labeled “Iso Gnd”.
The "Iso Gnd" terminal on the COM 2 port when the
port is used for RS-485 communications.
Recommended for low-level
control and I/O signals.
I/O Gnd
All even numbered pins on the 50-pin
Programmable Inputs/Outputs connector.
Analog Ground
Gnd
All terminals labeled “Gnd”.
Shield
The “Shield” terminal on the Resolver connector only.
Earth
The “Earth” terminal on the AC Input power connector.
(Multiple Earth terminals are provided for
convenience.)
All terminals labeled “Shield” — excluding the Shield
terminal on the Resolver connector. Includes the
terminal labeled "Shld" on the COM 2 port when it is
used for RS-232 communications.
“Motor Ground” terminal on the motor connector
The upper right mounting slot is unpainted. You can
use a star washer with the mounting screw in this slot
to provide a grounding path from the chassis ground to
the mounting surface.
Chassis Ground
Shield
You must reference this ground to
earth ground by Connecting the
EARTH terminal on the AC Input
connector to the external earth
ground.
Grounding
Procedure
Motor Gnd
Mounting Slot
When you connect grounds from other devices, remember that the APEX615n’s isolated
ground (Iso GND) is not internally connected to the analog ground (GND). To prevent electrical
noise problems, the APEX615n is designed so that grounds on remote I/O devices (triggers,
RS-232C terminals, inputs and outputs, PLCs, etc.) can be kept isolated from the
APEX615n’s analog and chassis ground.
Follow the guidelines below to make ground connections in your system.
1 . Only connect to Iso GND , if possible.
For most applications, there is no need to connect to the GND terminals. If you connect
external devices only to the left row of connectors, then make ground connections only to Iso
GND (not to GND). The next drawing shows such a connection.
APEX615n
RP 240
RS 232
Compumotor
Auxiliary
Ground Connection to Iso GND Only
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
Encoder Output
Iso Gnd
Ground
APEX615n Installation Guide
Limits
Signal
Remote
Device
18
External Encoder Input
Signal
Earth
Earth
APEX6152 &
APEX6154
Mounting
Slot
Compumotor
COM 1
Chassis
Ground
Iso Gnd
APEX6151
Iso
COM 2
Gnd
Shld
Mounting
Slot
Iso Gnd
Earth
Earth
Earth
External Encoder Input
Iso Gnd
Limits
Shield
I 2 T Limit
Chassis
Ground
Gnd
Auxiliary
Gnd
Gnd
Iso Gnd
Gnd
Shield
Analog
Ground
Note: Grounding connections shown
on COM 2 port are for RS-232
communications
Shield
49 50
Motor Ground
Isolated
Ground
2
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
1
Encoder Output
Gnd
APEX615n Ground Systems
Chapter 1. Installation
19
2 . If you must connect to a GND terminal, use a separate ground wire
from your remote device. Do not put a jumper between GND and
Iso GND.
If you connect signals from an external device to terminals on both the left row of connectors
and the right row of connectors, then run two separate ground wires from the remote device to
the APEX615n. Connect one wire to Iso GND, and connect the other to GND. The next drawing
shows how to make these connections.
APEX615n
External Encoder Input
RP 240
RS 232
Compumotor
Ground
Iso Gnd
Signal 2
Limits
Signal 1
Gnd
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
Remote
Device
Encoder Output
Auxiliary
Signal 1
Signal 2
Ground
Ground Connection to both Iso GND and GND
Separate ground wires will ensure that the isolated ground remains truly isolated from the
chassis ground.
3 . If you make connections between terminals on the left row of
connectors and the right row of connectors, connect the internal
grounds together by placing a jumper between Iso GND and GND .
As an example, the next drawing shows the output OUT-A controlling the RESET input on the
Drive Auxiliary connector.
APEX615n
External Encoder Input
RP 240
RS 232
Compumotor
Reset
Limits
Auxiliary
Out-A
Out-A
Iso Gnd
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
Encoder Output
Iso Gnd
Gnd
Notice that a jumper connects Iso
to GND. This ensures that both
signals—OUT-A and RESET—are
referenced to the same ground level.
GND
Ground Connection Between Iso GND and GND
4 . Connect shields on interface cables at the remote device only. Do
not connect the shields at the APEX615n end.
The cable shield from a remote device, such as an external encoder or an RP240 Remote
Operator Panel, should not be connected to the APEX615n.
EXCEPTION: The shield on the motor cable should be connected to the MOTOR GROUND
terminal on the motor connector. The shield on the resolver cable should be connected to the
SHIELD terminal on the resolver connector.
20
APEX615n Installation Guide
AC Input Connector
Connect AC power to the APEX615n's AC Input connector, which is an 8-pin removable
connector located on top of the unit. The connector can accept wire diameters as large as 10
AWG (6mm)
The AC power requirements for each model of the APEX615n are as follows:
APEX6151:
APEX6152:
APEX6154:
CONNECT AC
POWER IN TWO
PLACES
85-252VAC, Single Phase, (SM Motor - 120VAC only)
85-252VAC, 3-phase>202VAC preferred, or Single Phase
85-252VAC, , 3-phase>202VAC preferred, or Single Phase
Inside the APEX615n, there are two power systems, each with its own AC input terminals.
Ones system provides high voltage power to the power amplifier — its terminals are labeled
L1, L2, and L3 (or L1 and L2 on the APEX6151) The other system provides low voltage power
to the power amplifier's controller and the 6000 controller — its terminals are labeled Control
L1, Control L2.
AC Input
Connector
APEX6151 Internal Connections
Motor Connector
L1
Phase A
+
1 Phase
Rectifier
L2
Phase B
3 – Phase
Power
Amplifier
–
Phase C
V Bus +
Regen Resistor
Earth
V Bus –
Motor Ground
Earth
Shield
Front Panel – Right Side
Earth
Control L1
+5V
+15V
–15V
Low Voltage
Power
Supply
Control L2
LEDs
Controller
for
Power
Amplifier
ANA
GND
Encoder Output
Resolver
±15V
Tach Output
Gnd / Resolver Shield
Front Panel – Left Side
+5V (isolated)
Iso +5V
DC-to-DC
Converter
+15V
–15V
Iso Ground
COM 1
6000
Controller
COM 2
Limits
Triggers
Programmable I/O
Iso Gnd
Chapter 1. Installation
21
AC Input
Connector
APEX6152 & APEX6154 Internal Connections
Motor Connector
L1
Phase A
+
3 Phase
Rectifier
Phase B
3 – Phase
Power
Amplifier
L2
–
L3
Phase C
V Bus +
Regen Resistor
V Bus –
Motor Ground
Earth
Shield
Front Panel – Right Side
Earth
LEDs
Control L1
Controller
for
Power
Amplifier
Low Voltage
Power
Supply
Control L2
Encoder Output
Resolver
±15V
Tach Output
ANA
GND
Gnd / Resolver Shield
Front Panel – Left Side
Iso +5V
+15V
–15V
Iso Ground
DC-to-DC
Converter
+5V (isolated)
COM 1
6000
Controller
COM 2
Limits
Triggers
Programmable I/O
Iso Gnd
You must connect AC power to both L1/L2/L3 and Control L1/Control L2 (or to both L1/L2 and
Control L1/Control L2 on the APEX6151. The next drawing shows a simple way to do this.
APEX6151
AC Power
Source
Disconnecting
Means
APEX6152 and APEX6154
AC Input
Connector
AC Power
Source
Disconnecting
Means
L1
L1
L2
L2
Earth
L3
Earth
Earth
Earth
Earth
Control L1
Control L1
Control L2
Control L2
Using insulated jumper wires:
• Connect L1 to Control L1
• Connect L2 to Control L2
AC Connector with Jumpers Attached
22
APEX615n Installation Guide
AC Input
Connector
WIRING OPTIONS
APEX6151
AC Power
Source
Disconnecting AC power
turns off power output to
motor, and turns off controller
AC Power
Source
Disconnecting AC Power #1
turns off power output to
motor; controller remains
powered by AC Power #2
AC Power
Source #2
Disconnecting
Power to the Drive
AC Input
Connector
AC Power
Source
Disconnecting
Means
AC Input
Connector
L1
L1
L2
L2
Earth
L3
Earth
Earth
Earth
Earth
Control L1
Control L1
Control L2
Control L2
Disconnecting
Means
Disconnecting AC power
turns off power output to
motor; controller remains
powered
AC Power
Source #1
APEX6152 and APEX6154
Disconnecting
Means
AC Input
Connector
AC Power
Source
Disconnecting
Means
AC Input
Connector
L1
L1
L2
L2
Earth
L3
Earth
Earth
Earth
Earth
Control L1
Control L1
Control L2
Control L2
Disconnecting
Means
AC Input
Connector
AC Power
Source #1
Disconnecting
Means
AC Input
Connector
L1
L1
L2
L2
Earth
L3
Earth
Earth
Earth
Earth
Control L1
Control L1
Control L2
AC Power
Source #2
Control L2
Removing power to the drive portion of the APEX615n (L1/L2/L3 or L1/L2) will result in a
Drive Fault due to an under-voltage condition on the drive bus. There may be a delay from
when power is removed from the drive to when the Drive Fault condition is communicated to
the controller due to the time necessary to dissipate power from the drive bus capacitor. This
power dissipation rate is situation-dependent.
When the Drive Fault signal is received by the controller, the motion program will be
immediately killed (see !K command in the 6000 Series Software Reference). However, if the
controller has INFEN0 or DRIVE0 when the signal is received, the Drive Fault will be ignored
and the program being executed will continue to run.
To ensure that the controller is immediately aware of power being removed from the drive,
Compumotor recommends that the drive power terminals (L1/L2/L3 or L1/L2) be configured with
the ENABLE INPUT on the Drive Auxiliary connector. When the controller detects that the
ENABLE INPUT has changed state, it issues an Immediate Kill (!K) command, regardless of any
other conditions.
Bit 4 of the TASX command (TASX.4) returns the current status of the Drive Fault.
Bit 6 of the TINO command (TINO.6) returns the current status of the ENABLE INPUT.
Bit 4 of the ERROR command (ERROR.4) enables the error checking function such that the
controller will branch to the designated error program (ERRORP) when a Drive Fault is detected.
(Refer to the 6000 Series Software Reference for additional information about 6000 Series
commands.)
Chapter 1. Installation
23
Disconnecting
Power to the
Controller
Removing power to the controller portion of the APEX615n (Control L1 and Control L2) will
trigger a Drive Fault, plus the controller will issue a "shutdown" signal to the drive that is
equivalent to the DRIVE0 command.
When power is restored to the controller, the drive will need to be reset using the either the
DRESET command or the RESET Input on the Drive Auxiliary connector. (The DRESET
command is the equivalent of the RESET Input.)
Fusing Information
Recommended fuse sizes are:
APEX6151
APEX6151
APEX6152
APEX6154
(120
(240
(240
(240
VAC):
VAC):
VAC):
VAC):
15-25A slow blow type, Littelfuse p/n 326-025 (or equiv.)
12-15A slow blow type, Littelfuse p/n 326-015 (or equiv.)
12A slow blow type, Littelfuse p/n 326-012 (or equivalent)
20A slow blow type, Littelfuse p/n 326-020 (or equivalent)
WARNING
The APEX615n has no internal fuses. For safety purposes, provide a fuse in each of the AC
input lines.
The actual input power and current is a function of the motor's operating point (speed and
torque) and the duty cycle. The fuse value given above is for a drive and motor operating at
rated speed and rated torque at 100% duty. You can de-rate the fuse by scaling the above value
by your actual requirements.
24
APEX615n Installation Guide
Serial Communication
RS-232C Connections
RS-232C Daisy-Chain Connections*
Unit 0
Unit 1
Tx
Rx
GND
COM 1
Rx
Tx
Iso GND
COM 2
Rx+
Rx–
Tx+
Tx–
Iso GND
Standard 25-Pin
COM Port Pin Outs:
Pin 3 = Transmit (Tx)
Pin 2 = Receive (Rx)
Pin 5 = Ground (GND)
Pin 2 = Transmit (Tx)
Pin 3 = Receive (Rx)
Pin 7 = Ground (GND)
Rx
Tx
Iso GND
Tx
Rx
GND
Rx
Tx
Iso GND
Daisy Chain to a Computer or Terminal
+5V
Iso
GND
Rx
Tx
SHLD
Unit 0
Unit 1
Rx
Tx
Iso GND
Serial Port Connection
Standard 9-Pin
COM Port Pin Outs:
Unit 2
Rx
Tx
Iso GND
Unit 2
Rx
Tx
Iso GND
Rx
Tx
Iso GND
Stand-Alone Daisy Chain
*
Be sure to set unique devices addresses for each unit using the
ADDR command (see 6000 Series Software Reference).
NOTE: Maximum RS-232C cable length is 50 feet (15.25 meters)
RS-485 Connections (4-wire interface)
Unit #1
Iso Gnd
COM 2
Rx+
Rx–
Tx+
Tx–
Iso GND
+5VDC
Master
Unit
Tx+
120 Ω
Tx–
RS-485 Configuration
Rx+
Unit #2
120 Ω
Rx–
COM 2
Rx+
Rx–
Tx+
Tx–
Iso GND
Shield
Calculating Resistor Values
Vcc
Unit #3
Ra
Rx+
Rx–
Tx+
Tx–
Iso GND
COM 2
Before you can use RS-485
communication, you must reconfigure the COM 2 port by
setting internal jumper JU2 to
position 3, and setting DIP
switches 1-3 on SW2 and DIP
switches 1-2 on SW3 to the ON
position. Set DIP switch 3 on
SW3 to ON position for 4-wire
interface (2-wire is default, using
Tx+ and TX- terminals on COM2
port).
Refer to page 10 for instructions.
Vb
Balanced Cable.
Rc
Rb
Rd
Unit #31
681Ω
O 1 2 3 4
N
681Ω
Rx+
Rx–
Tx+
Tx–
Iso GND
COM 2
5VDC
120 Ω
120 Ω
Example
Calculate the equivalent resistance (Req)* of Rc / / Rb:
Rc / / Rb = 120Ω / / 120Ω = 60Ω
Step 2
Calculate the pull-up and pull-down resistor values knowing that
the FAILSAFE bias is 200mV and Vcc = 5V:
Vb = Vcc (Req / (Ra + Req + Rd))
solving for R' (defined as Ra + Rd)
R' = ((Req) Vcc / Vb) - Req
R' = ((60Ω) 5V / 0.2V) - 60Ω = 1440Ω
Since Ra and Rd are equal, Ra = Rd = 1440Ω / 2 = 720Ω
Step 3
Recalculate the equivalent resistance of RC / / (Ra + Rd):
Rc / / (Ra + Rd) = 120Ω / / (720Ω + 720Ω) = 110.77Ω
DIP switch selects internal resistor values (ON selects the resistor).
Use these resistors only for the last unit (or for a single unit).
Since the equivalent resistance is close (within 10%) to the characteristic
impedance of the cable (Zo), no further adjustment of resistor values is
required.
* Actual calculation
for equivalent resistance
(e.g., R1 / / R2):
NOTE: Maximum RS-485 cable length is 4000 feet (1220 meters)
The cable's characteristic impedance (Zo) = 120Ω.
Rc and Rb are equal and are selected to match Zo
(Rc = Rb = Zo = 120Ω).
Step 1
Iso GND
If your application requires terminating resistors other than 120Ω,
and/or bias resistors other than 681Ω, then make sure the internal
DIP switches are set to OFF and connect your own external resistors.
To calculate resistor values:
Assumptions:
R1 R2
(R1 + R2)
For further information,
consult a communications
interface reference.
Chapter 1. Installation
25
External Encoder
CONNECTIONS & INTERNAL SCHEMATICS
ENCODER Connector
Internal Schematic
Shield
Shield
Max. Cable Length is 100 feet.
Use 22 AWG wire.
Ground
Black
Z Channel –
Orange/White
Z Channel +
Orange
B Channel –
Green/White
B Channel +
Green
A Channel –
Brown/White
A Channel +
Brown
+5VDC
Red
SHLD
Iso GND
Isolated Ground
ZZ+ Same Circuit
B- as A Channel
B+
AA+
+5V
Chassis Ground
+1.8VDC
20 KΩ
20 KΩ
+5VDC
Wire colors for Compumotor E Series encoders
+5VDC
Incremental
Encoder
NOTE
If you are using a single-ended encoder,
leave the A-, B-, and Z- terminals on the
APEX615n unconnected.
PIN OUTS & SPECIFICATIONS (9-pin ENCODER Connector)
Pin Name
In/Out
Description
SHLD
ISO GND
Z–
Z+
B–
B+
A–
A+
+5V
--------IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
Shield—Internally connected to chassis ground (earth).
Isolated logic ground.
Z– Channel signal input.
Z+ Channel signal input.
B– Channel quadrature signal input.
B+ Channel quadrature signal input.
A– Channel quadrature signal input.
A+ Channel quadrature signal input.
+5VDC output to power the encoder.
Specification for all encoder inputs
Differential comparator accepts two-phase quadrature
incremental encoders with differential (recommended) or
single-ended outputs. Max. frequency is 1.2 MHz.
Minimum time between transitions is 833 ns.
TTL-compatible voltage levels: Low ≤ 0.4V, High ≥ 2.4V.
Maximum input voltage is 5VDC.
Requirements for Non-Compumotor Encoders
• Use incremental encoders with two-phase quadrature output. An index or Z channel
output is optional. Differential outputs are recommended.
• It must be a 5V (< 200mA) encoder to use the APEX615n's +5V output. Otherwise, it must
be separately powered with TTL-compatible (low ≤ 0.4V, high ≥ 2.4V) or open-collector
outputs.
26
APEX615n Installation Guide
End-of-Travel and Home Limit Inputs
NOTES
• Motion will not occur until you do one of the following:
- Install end-of-travel (POS & NEG) limit switches
- Disable the limits with the LHØ command (recommended only if load is not coupled)
- Change the active level of the limits with the LHLVL command
• Refer to the Basic Operations Setup chapter in the 6000 Series Programmer's Guide for
in-depth discussions about using end-of-travel limits and homing.
WARNING
If a runaway occurs (motor starts moving, usually at the fastest possible velocity, due to
servo instability), the APEX615n will shut down power output to the motor if the maximum
position error (set with the SMPER command) is exceeded before an end-of-travel limit
(either hardware of software) is encountered. However, if the maximum position error is
not exceeded by the time the limit is encountered, the APEX615n may not be able to
stop the servo mechanism.
CONNECTIONS & INTERNAL SCHEMATICS
ENCODER Connector
Internal Schematic
SHLD
Iso GND
ZZ+
BB+
AA+
+5V
HOM connected to GND (normally-open switch).
The home limit input is used during a homing move, which
is initiated with the HOM command. After initiating the
homing move, the controller waits for the home switch to
close, indicating that the load has reached the “home”
reference position. The active level (default is active low)
can be changed with the HOMLVL command. The
encoder's Z channel pulse can be used in conjunction with
the home switch to determine the home position (when
enabled with the HOMZ command).
Chassis Ground
LIMITS Connector
Iso GND
HOM
NEG
POS
POS & NEG connected to GND (normally-closed switches).
Mount each switch such that the load forces it to open before it
reaches the physical travel limit (leave enough room for the load to
stop). When the load opens the switch, the servo mechanism comes
to a halt. The actual stopping distance depends on the load's speed
and the hard limit deceleration (LHADA and/or LHAD) setting. The
servo mechanism will not be able to move in that same direction until
you execute a move in the opposite direction and clear the limit by
closing the switch (or you can disable the limits with the LH
command, but this is recommended only if the servo mechanism is
not coupled to the load). The active level (default is active low) can
be changed with the LHLVL command.
Isolated Ground
Similar circuits for NEG & POS inputs.
AUXILIARY Connector
ANI+
ANITRG-A
TRG-B
OUT-A
Iso GND
+5V
+5VDC Isolated
Ground
OUT-P
IN-P
6.8 KΩ
AUX-P
V_I/O
+5V connected to AUX-P and V_I/O (sourcing current).
Provides +5V power to the POS, NEG, and HOM input pull-up resistors.
As an alternative, you can connect AUX-P to an external power supply of up to +24VDC.
POS, NEG, and HOM input switching voltage levels are determined by V_I/O.
{Low≤[1/3 x (V_I/O)] volts, High≥[2/3 x (V_I/O) ]volts } If V_I/O is connected to a +5V power
supply (internal or external), AUX-P can be connected to a supply of up to +24VDC. If V_I/O is
connected to an external +24VDC power supply, then AUX-P must also be at +24VDC (or at Iso GND).
NOTE: AUX-P is also the pull-up for the TRG inputs.
SINKING CURRENT: To make the limit inputs (as well as the TRG inputs) sink current,
connect AUX-P to Iso GND.
CAUTION: Disconnect jumper to +5V before connecting external power supply to either IN-P, OUT-P, AUX-P, or V_I/O.
20.0 KΩ
18.2 KΩ
10.0 KΩ
LM 339
+
12.1 KΩ
31.6 KΩ
PIN OUTS & SPECIFICATIONS (4-pin LIMITS Connector)
Name
In/Out Description
Iso GND —
HOM
IN
NEG
IN
POS
IN
Isolated ground.
Home limit input.
Negative-direction end-of-travel
limit input.
Positive-direction end-of-travel
limit input.
Specification for all limit inputs
Switching voltage levels determined by V_I/O. Low ≤ 1/3 (V_I/O) volts, High ≥ 2/3 (V_I/O)
volts; internal 6.8 KΩ pull-ups to AUX-P terminal ; voltage range is 0-24V.
Active level for HOM is set with the HOMLVL command (default is active low, requiring
normally-open switch).
Active level for POS & NEG is set with the LHLVL command (default is active low,
requiring normally-closed switch).
Chapter 1. Installation
27
Trigger Inputs
Internal Schematic
ENCODER Connector
SHLD
GND
ZZ+
BB+
AA+
+5V
TRG-A/B connected to Iso GND (normally-open
switches).
The active level (default is active low) can be changed with the
INLVL command.
These inputs are like the general-purpose inputs on the 50-pin
header. The differences are (1) the triggers are pulled up via
the AUX-P pull-up terminal; and (2) the triggers can be
programmed with the INFNCi-H command to function as
position capture inputs and registration inputs.
Chassis Ground
Similar circuit for TRG-B input.
I/O Connector
ANI+
ANITRG-A
TRG-B
OUT-A
Iso GND
+5V
+5VDC Isolated
Ground
OUT-P
IN-P
6.8 KΩ
AUX-P
V_I/O
+5V connected to AUX-P and V_I/O (sourcing current).
Provides power to the TRG input pull-up resistors. As an alternative, you can connect AUX-P
to an external power supply of up to +24VDC. TRG input switching voltage levels are determined
by V-I/O. {Low≤[1/3 x (V_I/O)] volts, High≥[2/3 x (V_I/O) ]volts } If V_I/O is connected to a +5V power
supply (internal or external), AUX-P can be connected to a supply of up to +24VDC. If V_I/O is
connected to an external +24VDC power supply, then AUX-P must also be at +24VDC (or at Iso GND).
NOTE: AUX-P is also the pull-up for the HOM, NEG & POS inputs.
SINKING CURRENT: To make the trigger inputs (and HOM, NEG & POS) sink current, connect
AUX-P to Iso GND.
CAUTION: Disconnect jumper to +5V before connecting external power supply to either IN-P, OUT-P,
AUX-P, or V_I/O.
Connection to a Sinking Output Device
Electronic
Device
External Supply
20.0 KΩ
AUX-P
+
12.1 KΩ
31.6 KΩ
Electronic
Device
18.2 KΩ
.
.
20 0 KΩ
18 2 KΩ
V_I/O
.
10 0 KΩ
LM 339
V1
6.8 KΩ
Pulled
down to
ground
(sinking)
+
12.1 KΩ
R1
ISO Ground
GND
Out 5-24 Volts
APEX615n
5-24 VDC
10.0 KΩ
LM 339
Pulled up
(sourcing)
10.0 KΩ
LM 339
External Supply
V_I/O
The output should
be able to sink at
least 1mA of current.
18.2 KΩ
Connection to a Sourcing Output Device
APEX615n
5-24 VDC
20.0 KΩ
Trigger Input
Connection
.
-
6 8 KΩ
.
.
10 0 KΩ
Output
Out 5-24 Volts
Ground
+
12 1 KΩ
ISO Ground
GND
10.0 KΩ
Output
AUX-P
Trigger Input
Connection
Ground
Ground
Connection
Ground
Connection
ISO GND
ISO GND
Connection to a Combination of Sinking & Sourcing Outputs
Electronic
Device
External Supply
APEX615n
5-24 VDC
.
.
20 0 KΩ
18 2 KΩ
V_I/O
.
10 0 KΩ
LM 339
V1
Pulled up
(sourcing)
R1
AUX-P
.
6 8 KΩ
-
.
+
12 1 KΩ
ISO Ground
GND
.
10 0 KΩ
Output
Out 5-24 Volts
Ground
Trigger Input
Connection
R
Ground
Connection
ISO GND
Typical value for R = 450Ω (assuming R1 = 0)
Note: The value of R may vary depending on the value of R1 and V1.
28
APEX615n Installation Guide
If you will be connecting to a combination of sourcing and sinking outputs,
connect AUX-P to +5V to accommodate sinking output devices. Then for each
individual input connected to a sourcing output, wire an external resistor between
the APEX615n's trigger input terminal and ground (see illustration). The resistor
provides a path for current to flow from the device when the output is active.
PROGRAMMING TIP
Connecting to a sinking output? Set the trigger input's active level to low
with the INLVL command (Ø = active low, default setting).
Connecting to a sourcing output? Set the trigger input's active level to
high with the INLVL command (1 = active high).
Thus, when the output is active, the TIN status command will report a “1”
(indicates that the input is active), regardless of the type of output that is
connected.
For details on setting the active level and checking the input status refer to the
INLVL and TIN command descriptions in the 6000 Series Software
Reference .
General-Purpose Programmable Inputs & Outputs
VM50 ADAPTOR — for screw-terminal connections
In-P
1
2
Encoder Output
Out-P
Aux-P
CHA+
CHA CHB+
CHB CHZ+
CHZ Gnd
Ref
Sin
Cos
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
Shield
Red
Blk
2-Foot Cable
Grn
Blu
Brn
Wht
(provided with VM50)
MT+
MT Flt Relay+
Flt Relay NC
NC
49
50
2
4
1
6
3
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50
5
7
9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49
The VM50 snaps on to
any standard DIN rail.
VM50 Adaptor
Adaptor Board
Board
VM50
PIN OUTS & SPECIFICATIONS
Pin #
1
2
PROGRAMMABLE I/O
49
50
50-pin plug is
compatible with
OPTO-22™
signal
conditioning
equipment.
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
25
27
29
31
33
35
37
39
41
43
45
47
49
Function
Internal Schematics
Specifications
Input #16 (MSB of inputs)
Input #15
Input #14
Input #13
Input #12
Input #11
Input #10
Input #9
Output #8 (MSB of outputs)
Output #7
Output #6
Output #5
Input #8
Input #7
Input #6
Input #5
Output #4
Output #3
Output #2
Output #1 (LSB of outputs)
Input #4
Input #3
Input #2
Input #1 (LSB of inputs)
+5VDC
Inputs
Inputs
HCMOS-compatible voltage levels
(low ≤ 1.00V, high ≥ 3.25V).
Voltage range = 0-24V.
Sourcing Current: On the I/O connector,
connect IN-P to +5V or connect IN-P to your
own power supply of up to 24VDC.
Sinking Current: On the I/O connector,
connect IN-P to GND.
STATUS: Check with the TIN or INFNC
command.
Active level: Default is active low, but can
be changed to active high with the INLVL
command.
Optional External Supply
(up to 24VDC)
+
–
APEX615n
GND
ISO GND
+5V
+5VDC
Pulled up to +5V
IN-P
6.8 KΩ
Input
Connection
Ground
Connection
47 KΩ
74HCxx
ISO GND
Outputs
Optional External Supply
(up to 24VDC)
+
–
APEX615n
GND
ISO GND
+5V
+5VDC
Pulled up to +5V
OUT-P
4.7 KΩ
Output
Connection
Open
Collector
UDK2559
Ground
Connection
ISO
GND
Outputs
Open collector output.
Pull-up connection on I/O connector:
Connect OUT-P to +5V, or to an external
supply of up to 24V.
Max. voltage in the OFF state (not sinking
current) = 24V, max. current in the ON
state (sinking) = 300mA.
STATUS: Check with the TOUT status
command.
Active level: Default is active low, but can
be changed to active high with the OUTLVL
command.
ISO GND
NOTE1:
All even-numbered pins are connected to a common logic ground (DC ground).
LSB = least significant bit; MSB = most significant bit
NOTE 2:
Disconnect jumper to +5V before connecting external power supply to either IN-P, OUT-P, or AUX-P.
Chapter 1. Installation
29
INPUT CONNECTIONS — Connecting to electronic devices such as PLCs
Connection to a
Sinking Output
Device
Electronic
Device
APEX615n
GND
ISO GND
+5V
The output should
be able to sink at
least 1mA of current.
Pulled up
to +5V
(sourcing)
Out 5-24 Volts
+5VDC
IN-P
Output
Input
Connection
Ground
Ground
Connection
6.8 KΩ
74HCxx
47 KΩ
PROGRAMMING TIP
Connecting to a
sinking output? Set the
input's active level to low
with the INLVL command
(Ø = active low).
ISO GND
Connection to a
Sourcing Output
Device
Electronic
Device
APEX615n
GND
Pulled
down to
ground
(sinking)
V1
R1
ISO GND
+5V
IN-P
Input
Connection
Output
+5VDC
Out 5-24 Volts
6.8 KΩ
74HCxx
47 KΩ
Ground
Connection
Ground
Electronic
Device
Thus, when the output is
active, the TIN status
command will report a “1”
(indicates that the input is
active), regardless of the
type of output that is
connected.
Details on setting the active
level and checking the input
status are provided in the
6000 Series Programmer's
Refer also to the INLVL and
TIN command descriptions
in the 6000 Series Software
Reference .
ISO GND
Connection to a
Combination of
Sinking &
Sourcing
Outputs
Connecting to a
sourcing output? Set
the input's active level to
high with the INLVL
command (1 = active high).
APEX615n
GND
ISO GND
+5V
V1
Pulled up
to +5V
(sourcing)
R1
Out 5-24 Volts
Ground
IN-P
Input
Connection
Output
R
+5VDC
6.8 KΩ
47 KΩ
74HCxx
Ground
Connection
ISO GND
Typical value for R = 450Ω (assuming R1 = 0)
Note: The value of R may vary depending on the value of R1 and V1.
NOTE:
30
If you will be connecting to a combination of sourcing and sinking outputs, connect IN-P to +5V to
accommodate sinking output devices. Then for each individual input connected to a sourcing output, wire
an external resistor between the APEX615n's programmable input terminal and ground (see “R” in above
drawing). The resistor provides a path for current to flow from the device when the output is active.
APEX615n Installation Guide
OUTPUT CONNECTIONS (includes OUT-A) — for electronic devices such as PLCs
Connection to a Sinking Input (active high)
External Supply
(up to 24VDC)
Electronic
Device
+
Connection to a Sourcing Input (active low)
APEX615n
–
External Supply
(up to 24VDC)
Electronic
Device
+
–
APEX615n
GND
GND
ISO GND
+5V
ISO GND
+5VDC
+5V
+5VDC
V+
OUT-P
4.7 KΩ
Input
Output
Connection
Ground
Ground
Connection
OUT-P
Output
Connection
Input
UDK2559
UDK2559
Ground
Connection
Ground
4.7 KΩ
(open collector)
(open collector)
ISO GND
ISO GND
NOTE: It is not necessary to use the OUT-P pin for a sourcing input.
Connection to a Combination of Sinking & Sourcing Inputs
External Supply
(up to 24VDC)
+
APEX615n
–
GND
Electronic
Devices
ISO GND
+5V
+5VDC
V+
OUT-P
4.7 KΩ
Input
Output 1
Sourcing Input
UDK2559
Combinations of sourcing
and sinking inputs can be
accommodated at the same
voltage level. Be aware of
the input impedance of the
sourcing input module, and
make sure that there is
enough current flowing
through the input module
while in parallel with the
OUT-P pull-up resistor.
(open collector)
Ground
4.7 KΩ
Input
Output 2
Ground
Ground
Connection
UDK2559
(open collector)
ISO GND
Sinking Input
Connection to an Inductive Load (active low)
External Supply
(up to 24VDC)
+
–
APEX615n
GND
ISO GND
+5V
+5VDC
OUT-P
Output
Connection
4.7 KΩ
Use an external diode when driving
inductive loads. Connect the diode in
parallel to the inductive load,
attaching the anode to the
APEX615n output and the cathode to
the supply voltage of the inductive
load.
PROGRAMMING TIP
Connecting to an activehigh sinking input? Set
the output's active level to
high with the OUTLVL command
(1 = active high).
Connecting to an activelow sourcing input? Set
the output's active level to low
with the OUTLVL command
(Ø = active low).
Thus, when the APEX615n's
output is activated, current will
flow through the attached
input and the TOUT status
command will report a “1”
(indicates that the output is
active), regardless of the type
of input that is connected.
Details on setting the active
level and checking the output
status are provided in the
6000 Series Programmer's
Guide. Refer also to the
OUTLVL and TOUT command
descriptions in the 6000
Series Software Reference .
UDK2559
(open collector)
Chapter 1. Installation
31
THUMBWHEEL CONNECTIONS — for entering BCD data
Connection to the Compumotor TM8 Module
TM8 Thumbwheel Module
+
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
+5 GND I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 O5 O4 O3 O2 O1
APEX615n
Programmable Input #1
Programmable Input #2
Programmable Input #3
Programmable Input #4
Programmable Input #5
Pin #49 (+5VDC)
Pin #48 (ISO GND)
Programmable Output #1
Programmable Output #2
Programmable Output #3
Optional Sign Bit
Connection to your own Thumbwheel Module
Input #9 (sign)
Input #8 MSB
Input #7
Input #6
Input #5 LSB
Input #4 MSB
Input #3
Input #2
Input #1 LSB
most
significant
digit
least
significant
digit
APEX615n
Thumbwheel
#1
Thumbwheel
#2
Thumbwheel
#3
Thumbwheel
#4
Thumbwheel
#5
Thumbwheel
#6
Thumbwheel
#7
Thumbwheel
#8
Output #4
Output #3
Output #2
Output #1
I/O ISO GND
Sign
Bit
RP240 Remote Operator Panel
RP240 Connections when using RS-485
RP240 Back Plane
APEX615n Installation Guide
COM 1
Rx+ +5V
Iso
Rx– Gnd
Tx+
Rx
Tx–
Tx
Iso Gnd Shld
COM 2
If you will use RS-485 serial communication,
you must connect the RP240 to the COM 1
connector (and connect the RP240's +5V lead
to the +5V terminal on the
I/O connector).
In addition, you will have to issue these
commands to configure the APEX615n to
communicate successfully with the RP240
connected to COM 1 and with
RS-485 connected to COM 2.
PORT1........Select COM 1 as the affected port.
DRPCHK1.... On powerup, check for RP240 on COM 1.
PORT2........Select COM 2 as the affected port.
DRPCHKØ.... On powerup, do not check for RP240
..................on COM 2.
32
Rx
Tx
Iso Gnd
External Encoder Input
GND
Rx
Tx
+5V
+5V
Iso
Gnd
Rx
Tx
Shld
GND
Rx
Tx
+5V
Shield
Iso Gnd
Z–
Z+
B–
B+
A–
A+
+5V
Limits
COM 2
Rx+
Rx–
Tx+
Tx–
Iso Gnd
Rx
Tx
Iso Gnd
Iso Gnd
Home
Neg
Pos
Auxiliary
If you are experiencing electrical noise
problems, connect GND to the RP240's
aluminum back plane. This should correct
noise problems that arise if the RP240 back
plane or NEMA enclosure is at earth ground
potential.
COM 1
Optional Grounding Connection
ANI+
ANITrg-A
Trg-B
Out-A
Iso Gnd
+5V
Out-P
In-P
Aux-P
V_I/O
Lengthening I/O Cables
Bear in mind that lengthening cables increases noise sensitivity. (The maximum length of
cables is ultimately determined by the environment in which the equipment will be used.)
If you lengthen the cables, follow the precautions below to minimize noise problems.
• Use a minimum wire size of 22 AWG.
• Use twisted pair shielded cables and connect the shield to the earth ground of the remote
device. Leave the other end of the shield disconnected.
• Do not route I/O signals in the same conduit or wiring trays as high-voltage AC wiring
or motor cables.
Reducing noise on limit and trigger inputs. If you are experiencing noise
problems, try adding resistors to reduce noise sensitivity (see illustration below).
If you intend to use your own external
power supply, remove the +5V jumper first
(failure to do so will damage the product).
Power Supply Options
APEX615n
+5V
V_I/0
Optional
External Power Supply
(5-24VDC)
AUX-P
Add a resistor between the input and the power supply (this will lower
the input impedance and reduce noise sensitivity). Use a value
between 330Ω and 2.2KΩ, depending on noise suppression required.
Input Terminal
( Limits or Trigger)
Output Device,
Switch, etc.
Iso GND
Shield
Long Cable
Chapter 1. Installation
33
Drive Auxiliary Connector
Pin #:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Reset
Gnd
NC
Enable In
Fault Out
Gnd
NC
NC
Tach Out
Gnd
+15 V
Gnd
-15 V
Function:
Reset
Ground (tied to AC earth ground)
No Connection
Enable In
Fault Output
Ground (tied to AC earth ground)
No Connection
No Connection
Tachometer Output
Ground (tied to AC earth ground)
+15V
Ground (tied to AC earth ground)
-15V
Reset Input
Internal Schematic
Reset
+5VDC
Gnd
NC
Enable In
6.81K
47.5K
Fault Out
Gnd
NC
74HC14
NC
Tach Out
1000 pF
Gnd
+15 V
ANA GND
Gnd
-15 V
•
•
•
•
•
34
Active Low: to reset drive, hold RESET input at low voltage for at least 20 milliseconds.
Voltage Low = 1.0V maximum
Voltage High = 3.25V – 24V
Reset will begin when input reset signal (a low voltage) is released.
RESET input resets drive functions; RESET command resets controller. See Recovering
From Faults in Chapter 2: Troubleshooting for more information.
APEX615n Installation Guide
Enable Input
Internal Schematic
Reset
Gnd
NC
Enable In
+5VDC
Fault Out
Gnd
6.81K
NC
47.5K
NC
Tach Out
74HC14
Gnd
+15 V
1000 pF
Gnd
-15 V
ANA GND
• Active Low: to enable the APEX615n, hold ENABLE IN at low voltage.
• Voltage Low = 1.0V maximum
• Voltage High = 3.25V – 24V
A switch wired between ENABLE IN and GND can be used as a manual disable switch.
Opening the switch disables the APX615n, which shuts down power output to the motor,
turns off the ENABLE LED, and illuminates the DISABLE LED. When the controller detects
that ENABLE IN has changed state, it issues an Immediate Kill (!K) command to stop the
program in progress. If motion is commanded while ENABLE IN is not grounded, motion will
not occur and the error message "WARNING: ENABLE INPUT INACTIVE" will appear in
the terminal emulator. See the 6000 Series Software Reference for information on commands.
Bit 6 of the TINO command (TINO.6) returns the current status of the ENABLE INPUT.
WARNING
Do not use ENABLE IN by itself as an emergency stop. The motor can freewheel when the drive
is disabled and may not stop immediately. Use a mechanical brake or some other method to
stop the motor in an emergency.
Fault Output
Internal Schematic
Reset
Gnd
NC
Enable In
Fault Out
BS170
Gnd
Fault All
NC
NC
Tach Out
Gnd
+15 V
ANA GND
Gnd
-15 V
• Active HIGH
• Maximum Applied Voltage:
• Maximum Current
NO FAULT
FAULT
40VDC
200mA
= Output will be low
= Output will float (go HIGH)
Chapter 1. Installation
35
Tachometer Output
Internal Schematic
Reset
Gnd
NC
Enable In
Fault Out
Gnd
20K
NC
NC
20K
From RDC
velocity output
-
Tach Out
Gnd
+15 V
+
LF347
Gnd
-15 V
ANA GND
Tachometer Output: ±10V at 15mA (max)
• Use DIP Switch #3, position 5, to scale output:
• OFF = 1V/1000 rpm for one speed resolvers
• ON = 1V/1000 rpm for two speed resolvers.
±15V Output
Reset
Internal Schematic
Gnd
NC
EnableIn
Fault Out
Gnd
NC
NC
TachOut
Gnd
+15V
+15V
Gnd
-15 V
–15V
ANA GND
+15V Output: +15V ±5% at 15 mA
–15V Output: –15V ±5% at 15 mA
36
APEX615n Installation Guide
Encoder Output Connector
The encoder output connector is a dual use connector. It can be used for either Encoder Output
or for Hall Effect Input. Use DIP Switch #3, position 4, to select desired function.
Encoder Output
OFF = Encoder Output (derived from the resolver input)
ON = Hall Effect Input mode
CHA+
CHA CHB+
CHB CHZ+
CHZ Gnd
Encoder Output
Pin #: Function:
1 Channel A+
2 Channel A–
3 Channel B+
4 Channel B–
5 Channel Z+
6 Channel Z–
7 Ground
Hall Effect Input
Pin #: Function:
1 No Connect
2 No Connect
3 Hall +5VDC
4 Hall 1
5 Hall 2
6 Hall 3
7 Hall Ground
Schematic diagrams of the Encoder Output circuit and of the Hall Effect Input circuit are
shown in the next sections.
The encoder output can be used to send information to an external device. In multi-axis
applications, for example, with APEX615ns running in following mode, you can connect the
encoder output from the master unit to the encoder input of the slave unit, as shown in the
next drawing. See the Programmer's Guide for details.
CHA+ to A– (note polarity)
CHA- to A+ (note polarity)
CHB+ to B+
CHB- to BCHZ+ to Z+
CHZ- to ZGnd to Iso Gnd
Connect
APEX6151
NC
CHA+
CHA -
Shield
External Encoder Input
Connect
Encoder Output
Encoder Output to
External Devices
Iso Gnd
ZZ+
BAPEX6151
B+
AA+
+5V
NC
CHB+
CHB CHZ+
CHZ -
Do not connect shield
Gnd
MASTER
SLAVE
Chapter 1. Installation
37
Encoder Quadrature Outputs
Internal Schematic
ENCODER OUTPUT Connector
AM26LS31
From RDC
CHA+
CHA CHB+
AM26LS31
CHB CHZ+
From RDC
AM26LS31
CHZ -
From RDC
Gnd
The APEX615n’s encoder outputs are pseudo-quadrature outputs. These quadrature outputs are
called pseudo because they are hardware–derived from resolver information and not from an
actual encoder. The resolution is 1024 counts per revolution (pre-quadrature), or 4096 counts
per revolution (post-quadrature).
The position of the motor shaft can be determined by counting pulses. The APEX615n has a
quadrature detect circuit that enhances resolution. Channels A and B produce two square waves
that are 90 electrical degrees apart. By monitoring the rising and falling edges of CHA and
CHB, each pulse is equivalent to four counts. In this way, the 1024 counts are translated into
4096 counts, as the next figure shows.
Channel A
= 5 counts
Channel B
= 5 counts
Quadrature
Detect
= 20 counts
Time
Channel A leads Channel B
for clockwise motor shaft rotation
Direction can be determined by comparing the phase shift of Channel A relative to Channel B.
For example, if Channel A leads channel B, as shown in the previous drawing, the motor shaft
is turning in a clockwise direction.
The quadrature outputs are true differential (or complementary) outputs. The use of differential
outputs increases the system’s noise immunity. When Channel A+ goes high, Channel Agoes low, and vice versa.
The Z Channel, or marker, provides a reference pulse once per revolution. The Z channel
outputs (CHZ+, CHZ–) are true differential, or complementary, outputs.
360°
Channel A
Channel B
Channel Z
90°
Width of Channel Z pulse is 90°,
relative to width of Channel A cycle.
The width of the Z channel pulse, relative to the A channel cycle, is 90°.
38
APEX615n Installation Guide
Time
Hall Effect Input
The following circuit is internally connected to the encoder connector when DIP Switch #3,
position 4 is turned ON.
Internal Schematic
+5VDC
CHA+
+5VDC
From Hall
Select
DIPswitch
1K
(3 plcs)
CHA +5V
CHB+
Hall 1
CHB -
Hall 2
CHZ+
Hall 3
CHZ -
Gnd
Gnd
74HC14
(3 plcs)
3906
10K
(3 plcs)
0.1 F
(3 plcs)
When this circuit is active, the Encoder Output connector can be used for Hall effect sensor
inputs. The APEX615n uses the Hall sensor information to determine rotor position, so that
it can commutate the motor correctly.
With this circuit turned off, the APEX615n uses resolver inputs to determine rotor position.
It derives encoder signals from the resolver inputs, and sends the encoder signals out through
the Encoder Output connector, as described in the previous section.
Resolver Connector When using the APEX615n in Hall effect mode, Compumotor recommends installing jumper
Jumpers When in
wires on the resolver connector as shown below. Also use the SFB1 command in your startHall Effect Mode
up program to select an external encoder as your feedback source. Direct questions on this
topic to the Compumotor Applications Department at the phone numbers provided on the
inside front cover of this document.
Red
Sin
Black
Green
Ref
Cos
Shield
Brown
Blue
White
MT+
MT -
Flt Relay+
Flt Relay -
Jumpers:
Red to Brown
Black to White
NC
NC
Chapter 1. Installation
39
Resolver Connector
Connect the motor end of the resolver cable to the motor. Cables are available for SM motors
in 10 and 25 foot lengths; and for APEX Series motors in 10, 25, 50, and 100 foot lengths.
The cables have MS-type connectors on the motor end of the cable. You can also order custom
cables of any length. Call Compumotor's Customer Service Department at the phone numbers
provided on the inside front cover of this document.. Cable lengths in excess of 100 feet are
not recommended.
Plug the drive end of the cable into the APEX615n's resolver input connector. (The drive end
of the cable should already be wired to the removable 13-pin resolver connector, as shown
below. The connector can accept wires as large as 12 AWG (4 mm2).)
Function
Red
Sin
Black
Green
Ref
Cos
Shield
Brown
Blue
White
MT+
MT -
Flt Relay+
Flt Relay NC
NC
Shield
Stator 3
Stator 1
Stator 2
Stator 4
Rotor 1
Rotor 2
Motor Temp+
Motor Temp Fault Relay+
Fault Relay No Connection
No Connection
APEX Cable
Color Code
Uninsulated
Red
Black
Green
Blue
Brown
White
Yellow
Orange
SM Cable
Color Code
Uninsulated
Red
Black
Green
Blue
Brown
White
Yellow
Yellow
Schematic diagrams of each input and output on the resolver connector are shown below.
Internal Schematic
1:1
RESOLVER Connector
To RDC
Shield
Red
Black
1:1
Green
To RDC
Blue
Stator Input Voltage:
2V r ms ± 5%
Brown
White
MT+
MT Flt Relay+
1:1
4.25V rms ± 5%
at 7 kHz ± 5%
(sine wave)
Flt Relay NC
NC
DIP Switch #3, position 4, must be OFF so that:
•
Internal microprocessor uses resolver information for commutation
•
Encoder output will be enabled
•
Hall Effect input will be disabled
40
APEX615n Installation Guide
Motor Temperature
Sensor Input
The resolver connector has two terminals through which the APEX615n can monitor motor
temperature. The terminals, labeled MT+ and MT–, should be connected to the two leads of a
normally-closed temperature sensor mounted on the motor. When the motor is within its
temperature limits, the sensor will be closed, thus shorting together MT+ and MT–. If the
motor overheats, the sensor will open. Circuit continuity will be broken, which triggers
protection circuitry in the APEX615n. It will shut down its power output, and illuminate the
red LED labeled Motor Fault.
For APEX Series motors, connect the yellow wire in the resolver cable to MT+. Connect the
orange wire to MT–. For SM Series motors, both wires are yellow; connect one to MT+ and the
other to MT-.
For other motors with normally-closed temperature sensors, connect the sensor's two wires to
and MT–.
MT+
NOTE
If your motor has no temperature sensor, use a wire to short together MT+ and MT– on the
resolver connector. The drive will not operate unless these two terminals are shorted together.
Internal Schematic
RESOLVER Connector
Shield
Red
Black
+5VDC
Green
Blue
Brown
White
10K
10K
MT+
MT Flt Relay+
0.1 F
74HC14
Flt Relay NC
NC
Chapter 1. Installation
41
Motor Braking —
Fault Relay
Terminals
If the APEX615n faults, for any reason, the drive will be disabled and the motor will
freewheel. Refer to Chapter 2: Troubleshooting for all fault conditions. If a freewheeling load
is unacceptable, use the fault relay terminals Fault Relay+ and Fault Relay– to control a motor
brake.
The fault relay inside the APEX615n is normally open. This means that when the drive is
faulted or disabled, or when the power is off, the relay will be open. When the APEX615n is
enabled, it energizes the relay coil, and holds the relay closed. The relay is rated for 5 amps at
24VDC or 120VAC.
Internal Schematic
RESOLVER Connector
Shield
Red
Black
Green
Blue
Brown
+5VDC
White
MT+
MT Flt Relay+
Flt Relay NC
NC
Fault All
Most motor brakes have a coil that, when energized, will release the brake. To control a brake
with the fault relay terminals:
• Connect the power source for the brake to one of the fault relay terminals.
• Connect the other fault relay terminal to the brake.
• If you use a DC power source, you may need to connect a diode across the brake coil to
reduce voltage spikes when the brake is engaged or disengaged. A 1N4936 diode (or
equivalent) should be sufficient.
42
APEX615n Installation Guide
EXAMPLE 1: APEX Series motors are available from Compumotor with an optional
mechanical brake. Call Compumotor’s Customer Service Department (800-722-2282) for
more information. The next drawing shows how to connect the brake to the fault relay
terminals.
Drive
Condition
Power OFF
Disabled
Faulted
Enabled
Relay
State
Open
Open
Open
Closed
+5VDC to +24VDC
Pull-up
Resistor
Fault All
Fault Out
Fault Relay
Max Current Rating
5A at 24VDC, or
5A at 120VAC
Relay Type:
Normally Open
Resolver Cable
Flying Leads for Brake
(from Resolver Connector)
Internal Schematic
+24VDC
+5VDC
Fault Relay+
Fault Relay–
Optional
Diode
(1N4936)
APEX615n
Fault Relay with Mechanical Brake
24VDC is applied, through the fault relay terminals, to one of the flying leads on the motor's
resolver connector. The other lead is connected to ground. An optional diode is shown installed
between the two leads. The diode's polarity is correct as shown.
The drawing also shows that the fault output and the fault relay are controlled by the same
internal signal. Any fault condition that triggers the fault output will also cause the fault relay
to turn off (relay will be opened).
You can also use external resistors for motor braking, as the next example shows.
Chapter 1. Installation
43
EXAMPLE 2: The next drawing illustrates how to connect auxiliary resistors to control
motor braking. The drawing shows that during normal operations, the motor contactor is
energized and provides a direct connection between the motor and drive. The motor contactor
(N.O. = normally open with power removed; N.C. = normally closed with power removed)
is controlled by the fault relay terminals on the APEX6151's resolver connector. If the drive
faults or if the line voltage is disconnected, the contactor connects the motor braking resistors
across the motor.
In-P
1
2
Encoder Output
Out-P
Aux-P
CHA+
CHA CHB+
CHB CHZ+
CHZ Gnd
APEX615n
Ref
Sin
Cos
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
Shield
Red
Resolver Cable
Blk
Grn
Blu
Brn
Wht
MT+
MT -
Fault Relay+
5A Maximum at
24VDC or 120VAC
Flt Relay+
Flt Relay NC
NC
49
50
Fault Relay–
RY
Motor
Contactor
RY
Phase C
RY
Phase B
OR
Phase A
R∆
N.O.
N.C.
R∆
R∆
Motor Cable
Motor Ground
Motor Braking with Resistors
The braking resistors can be sized by analyzing specific applications. If the total load inertia is
less than five times the rotor inertia, non-inductive 200 watt power resistors can be used as the
braking resistors. For a wye configuration, use 5 ohms or more (RY = 5Ω). For a delta
configuration, use 15 ohms or more (R∆ = 15Ω). If quicker stopping is required, the braking
resistor values can be lowered, but you must increase their power ratings.
CAUTION
Braking resistors provide very little braking at zero velocity. If standstill braking or emergency
stopping is required, you can order the optional spring-type mechanical brake described in
Example 1 above.
44
APEX615n Installation Guide
Connecting the Motor
The motor cable connects the APEX615n’s power output, located on the bottom of the drive,
to the motor's power input. APEX and SM motor cables have an MS style connector on the
end that attaches to the motor. You must wire the other end of the cable to the APEX615n’s
motor connector, which is a 8-pin removable connector located on the bottom of the cabinet.
The connector can accept wire diameters as large as 10 AWG (6 mm2).
D
A
N
G
E
Motor Connector
(Located on bottom of unit)
R
HIGH VOLTAGE
Shield
Motor Ground
Phase C
Phase B
Phase A
V Bus -
Shield
Motor Ground
Phase C
Phase B
Phase A
V Bus Regen Resistor
V Bus+
Regen Resistor
V Bus+
Connector
Terminal
APEX Motor Cable
Wire Color
SM Motor Cable
Wire Color
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Motor Ground *
Shield *
Orange
Blue
Gray
Green
Unshielded
Red/Yellow
White/Yellow
Black/Yellow
Green/Yellow
Unshielded
* Motor Ground
and Shield are connected internally to the Earth terminal on the AC power
connector
WARNING
DO NOT OMIT the Motor Ground connection. Internal failure of motor insulation can
place the motor frame at deadly potential if it is not properly grounded. Do not rely solely on
mounting bolts for motor grounding.
At this time, make no attachments to the remaining three positions on the motor connector:
V Bus+, V Bus–, Regen Resistor.
After wiring the connector to the cable, connect the motor cable to the motor and to the
APEX615n.
WARNING
The motor connector and cable produce lethal voltages. Never insert or remove the motor
cable with AC power turned on to the APEX615n.
Chapter 1. Installation
45
Regeneration
Resistor
The APEX615n can dissipate regenerated energy in its internal regeneration resistor. If an
APEX615n system regenerates more energy than the internal resistor can dissipate, you can
connect an external resistor between the two terminals labeled V Bus+ and Regen Resistor,
located on the motor connector. The external resistor will double the APEX615n 's dissipation
capabilities.
The APEX615n's regeneration circuit works automatically—there are no adjustments to make.
The circuit monitors the voltage on the power bus. If regenerated energy from the motor
causes the bus voltage to rise above a threshold value, the circuit closes a switch, thus
connecting the regeneration resistor between the positive and negative sides of the power bus,
V Bus+ and VBus–. The energy is then dissipated in the resistor. During the regeneration event,
the red LED labeled Regen Active, located on the APEX615n's front panel, will be illuminated.
See Chapter 2: Troubleshooting for additional information about the regeneration LEDs. See
Appendix G for information on how to determine if an external regeneration resistor is necessary
for your system, and if so, how to calculate the proper regeneration resistor value.
Testing the Installation
WARNING
This test procedure allows you to control I/O and produce motion. Make sure that
exercising the I/O will not damage equipment or injure personnel. We recommend that you
leave the motor uncoupled from the load, but if you have coupled the load to the motor,
make sure that you can move the load without damaging equipment or injuring personnel.
NOTE
The test procedures in the table are based on the factory-default active levels for the
APEX615n's inputs and outputs. Verify these settings with the following status commands:
Command Entered
INLVL
HOMLVL
LHLVL
OUTLVL
46
APEX615n Installation Guide
Response Should Be
*INLVLØØØØ_ØØØØ_ØØØØ_ØØØØ_ØØ
*HOMLVLØ
*LHLVLØØ
*OUTLVLØØØØ_ØØØØ_Ø
Test Setup
Computer
or
Terminal
APEX6151
Compumotor
COM1
Serial Connection:
RS-232C
or
RS-485
Rx
Torque Cmd
Test Point
Tx
Iso Gnd
Rx+ +5V
COM2
Iso
Terminal Emulation for IBM/Compatibles
Tx-
Tx
Tach Output
Calibration
External Encoder Input
Iso Gnd Shld
Shield
Iso Gnd
ZZ+
BB+
Enable
Disable
Bridge Fault
Drive Fault
Motor Fault
Over Voltage
I2T Limit
Regen Fault
Regen Active
A+
Limits
Gnd
Iso Gnd
NC
Home
Enable In
Neg
Fault Out
Pos
Gnd
NC
ANI+
ANI Trg-A
Auxiliary
(or 120VAC for
APEX6151)
Reset
+5V
NC
Tach Out
Gnd
Trg-B
+15V
Out-A
Gnd
Iso Gnd
-15V
+5V
Out-P
In-P
Aux-P
V_I/O
1
2
Encoder Output
I/O Connections
(to be tested)
Connect to 240VAC
and ground
A-
CHA+
CHA CHB+
CHB CHZ+
CHZ Gnd
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
Having serial communication problems?
Refer to Chapter 2, Troubleshooting, for help.
Cos
Red
Sin
Shield
Grn
Blk
Blu
Ref
To communicate with the APEX615n, you will
need a terminal emulation program. We
recommend you use Motion Architect for Windows
or the DOS Support Software, which are provided
in your ship kit. Both provide terminal emulation
and program editor features. Motion Architect is
more popular because of its graphical interface
and its ensemble of programming tools.
Using Motion Architect:
1. To install, insert Disk 1 into your disk drive
and run the Setup program (setup.exe).
2. After the Setup program is finished
click on “Run Motion Architect”.
3. From the Product/Selection dialog box,
select “APEX615n” and click OK.
4. Click on “Terminal” from the main menu to
run the terminal emulator.
Using the 6000 DOS Support Software:
1. Follow the installation/run instructions
on the disk label.
2. Tab over to “Terminal Emulator” and
press <enter> to run the terminal emulator.
If you use a different terminal emulation software
package, make sure to configure it as follows:
9600 Baud
8 Data Bits
No Parity
1 Stop Bit
Full Duplex
Enable XON/XOFF
Offset
Balance
Rx- Gnd
Tx+ Rx
Brn
Wht
MT+
MT -
Flt Relay+
Flt Relay NC
49
50
NC
The installation test will cause motion. Make
sure the motor is secured in place.
If you have coupled the load to the motor,
make sure that the load can move without
causing injury to equipment or personnel.
Motor
Chapter 1. Installation
47
Connections
Test Procedure
Response Format (left to right)
End-of-travel
and Home
limits
NOTE: If you are not using end-of-travel limits, issue the Disable Limits (LHØ) command and
ignore the first two bits in each response field.
TLIM response:
bit 1 = POS limit
bit 2 = NEG limit
bit 3 = home limit
1. Enable hard limits using the LH3 command.
2. Close the end-of-travel switches and open the home switch.
3. Enter the TLIM command. The response should be *TLIM11Ø.
4. Open the end-of-travel switches and close the home switch.
5. Enter the TLIM command. The response should be *TLIMØØ1.
6. Close the POS end-of-travel switch and open the home switch.
6. Enter the TLIM command. The response should be *TLIM1ØØ.
Internal
Encoder
Feedback
(Resolverbased Encoder)
1. Enter these commands: L<cr>, TPE<cr>, T.3<cr>, and LN<cr>. This will begin a
continuous display of the encoder's position. Press the <return> key to move the display to
the next line and save the current value.
TPE response (encoder counts ):
±encoder counts
2. Manually rotate the encoder shaft and verify that the position changes as you rotate the
encoder shaft. If you connected the encoder as instructed earlier in this chapter, turning the
shaft clockwise should increase the position reading. If the reading does not change, or if
the direction is reversed, check the connections.
3. When finished, enter the !K (immediate Kill) command to stop the continuous report-back.
Motor (motion)
NOTE: Use default settings for all parameters (if necessary, issue a RESET command to
return the settings to their defaults). Make sure that the motor is properly supported, with
no load attached to the shaft.
Direction of rotation:
1. Enter the DRIVE1 command to enable the drive. The Enable LED will illuminate, and the
Disable LED will turn off.
2. Enter the LH0 command to disable the hard limits.
3. Enter the GO command. to initiate motion. The motor turns one revolution in the clockwise
direction, using the default motor parameters (A=10.0000, V=1.0000, D=+4096).
Clockwise
(positive counts)
Counter-clockwise
(negative counts)
4. Enter the D- command to change the move direction to counterclockwise (D=-4096).
5. Enter the GO command. to initiate motion. The motor turns one revolution in the
counterclockwise direction.
NOTE: If the motor does not turn, or does not turn in the correct direction, check the DIP
switch settings and cable connections, and perform the test procedure again. If you
change DIP switch settings, cycle power before you continue operations.
Programmable
Inputs
(incl. triggers)
1. Open the input switches or turn off the device driving the inputs.
2. Enter the TIN command.
TIN response:
bits 1-16 = prog. inputs 1 - 16
bits 17 & 18 = TRG-A & TRG-B
The response should be *TINØØØØ_ØØØØ_ØØØØ_ØØØØ_ØØ.
3. Close the input switches or turn on the device driving the inputs.
4. Enter the TIN command.
The response should be *TIN1111_1111_1111_1111_11.
Programmable
Outputs
1. CAUTION: Disconnect all programmable outputs before proceeding to step 2.
2. Enter the OUTALL1,9,1 command to turn on (sink current on) all outputs.
3. Enter the TOUT command.
The response should be *TOUT1111_1111_1.
4. Enter the OUTALL1,9,Ø command to turn off all outputs.
5. Enter the TOUT command.
The response should be *TOUTØØØØ_ØØØØ_Ø.
RP240
1. Cycle power to the APEX615n.
2. If the RP240 is connected properly, the RP240's status LED should be green and one of the
messages on the computer or terminal display should read *RP24Ø CONNECTED.
If the RP240's status LED is off, check to make sure the power connections are secure.
If the RP240's status LED is green, but the message on the terminal reads “*NO REMOTE
PANEL”, the RP240 Rx and Tx lines are probably switched. Remove power and correct.
3. Assuming you have not written a program to manipulate the RP240 display, the RP240
screen should display the following:
RUN
48
COMPUMOTOR 615N SERVO CONTROLLER
JOG STATUS
DRIVE DISPLAY ETC
APEX615n Installation Guide
TOUT response:
bits 1-8 = prog. outputs 1 - 8
bit 9 = OUT-A
Mounting & Coupling the Motor
WARNINGS
•
•
•
Improper motor mounting and coupling can jeopardize personal safety, and compromise system performance.
Never disassemble the motor; doing so will cause contamination, significant reduction in magnetization, and loss of torque.
Improper shaft machining will destroy the motor’s bearings, and void the warranty. Consult a factory Applications Engineer
(see phone number on inside of front cover) before you machine the motor shaft.
Mounting the Motor
Servo motors used with the APEX615n can produce very high torque and acceleration. If the mounting is
inadequate, this combination of high torque/high acceleration can shear shafts and mounting hardware. High
accelerations can produce shocks and vibrations that require much heavier hardware than for static loads of the
same magnitude.
Under certain move profiles, the motor can produce low-frequency vibrations in the mounting structure that
can cause fatigue in structural members. A mechanical engineer should check the machine design to ensure
that the mounting structure is adequate.
Use flange bolts to mount servo motors. The pilot, or centering flange on the motor’s front face, can help you
position the motor. Foot-mount or cradle configurations are not recommended, because the motor’s torque is
not evenly distributed around the motor case. When a foot mount is used, for example, any radial load on the
motor shaft is multiplied by a much longer lever arm.
APEX Motor Dimensions
MS Connectors
0.813
(20.650)
(4x) Ø 0.203 (5.156)
thru holes equally
spaced on Ø2.625 (66.675)
bolt circle
3.50
(88.9)
0.750
(19.05)
2.88
(73.15)
Ref
1.500 ± 0.001
(38.10 ± 0.025)
0.343 ± 0.005
(8.712 ± 0.127)
Motor Length
1.856
(47.142) Sq
2.25
(57.15) Sq
0.3751 +
(9.52 +
-
Shaft Options
0.60
(15.24)
0.340 (8.636)
Ø0.375 (9.525)
-N
(None)
-F
(Flat)
0.094
(2.39)
Motor Sizes
0.416 (10.566)
-K
(Sq Key)
0.0005
0.0000
0.013)
0.000)
Motor Length
Model
6.340 (161.036) 233 Motor
5.340 (135.636) 232 Motor
4.340 (110.236) 231 Motor
Longer lengths available.
Consult Compumotor for information.
SM Series Motor Dimensions
Dimensions in inches (mm)
Chapter 1. Installation
49
A 0.003 TIR (0.08)
1.18 ± .02
(30.0 ± .5)
2.720
(69.0)
A 0.003 TIR (0.08)
2.76 + 0.06
- 0.00
(70.0 + 1.5)
- 0.0)
2.11 ± 0.004
(53.6 ± 1.0)
2.76 + 0.06
- 0.00
0.07 (1.8)
(70.0 + 1.5)
- 0.0)
Ø0.228-Ø5.80 thru four holes equally
spaced on Ø2.953 (Ø75.00) Dia. B.C.
0.197 (5.00)
2.362 +
(60.00 +
-
0.79 (20.0)
min
0.093
(2.36)
0.375
(9.54)
0.0005
0.0003
0.012)
0.007)
Dimension—inches (mm)
0.551 + 0.0003
- 0.0001
(14.00 + 0.008)
- 0.003)
-A0.0014 (0.035)
Tolerances unless
otherwise specified:
.XXX ±.005
.XX
±.010
.X
±.030
Angles ±1°
1.53
(38.9)
Keyway
Detail
0.433 (11.00)
APEX602 Dimensions
Brake Option
50
APEX615n Installation Guide
A 0.003 TIR (0.08)
9.30
(236.2)
4.87
(123.7)
0.12 (3.0)
1.18 ± 0.02
(30.0 ± 0.5)
0.78 (19.8) min.
3.077 (78.16)
0.44 (11.2)
A 0.003 TIR (0.08)
3.150 +
(80.00 +
-
0.69
(17.5)
0.0005
0.0003
0.012)
0.007)
3.167 (80.44)
0.551 + 0.0003
- 0.0001
(14.00 + 0.008)
- 0.003)
-A0.0014 (0.035)
0.3932 (9.987)
M5 x 0.8 Tap x 0.39 (10.0) Min. DP
(4) holes equally spaced on 3.937
(100.0) Diameter B. C.
Resolver and Thermostat Receptacle
Motor Receptacle
3.14
(79.8)
0.197 (5.00)
2.56
(65.0)
3.62 +
(92.00 +
Square
0.197
0.000
5.0)
0.0)
Keyway
Detail
Ø0.276 + 0.014 (Ø7.00 + 0.36)
- 0.000
- 0.00)
Dia. thru four holes equally
spaced on Ø3.937 (Ø100.00)
Dia. B.C.
0.433 (11.00)
Dimensions in inches (mm)
APEX603 Dimensions
Chapter 1. Installation
51
A .003 TIR
(.08)
1.18 ± .02
(30.0 ± .5)
2.720
(69.0)
.79 MIN
(20.0)
2.11 ± 0.004
(53.6 ± 1.0)
2.76
.093
(2.36)
+.06
-.00
(70.0 +1.5
-0.0 )
2.76 +.06
-.00
(70.0 +1.5
-0.0 )
6.48
(164)
9.61
(244.2)
.375
(9.54)
2.362 +0.0005
-0.0003
(60.00 +0.012
-0.007 )
A 0.003 TIR
(.08)
.07 (1.8)
ø.228 (ø5.80) THRU
(4) HOLES EQ. SPACED ON
ø2.953 (ø75.00) B.C.
.551 +.0003
-.0001
(14.00 +.008
-.003 )
-A.0014
(.035)
1.53
(38.9)
.197 (5.00)
.196 (4.97)
Dimensions in inches (mm)
Tolerances unless
otherwise specified:
.XXX ±.005
.XX
±.010
.X
±.030
Angles ±1°
.433 (11.00)
.429 (10.90)
KEYWAY DETAIL
APEX604 Dimensions
52
APEX615n Installation Guide
BRAKE OPTION
A 0.003 TIR (0.08)
A
1.18 ± 0.02
(30.0 ± 0.5)
Max.
0.69 (17.5)
B
0.12 (3.0)
0.78 (19.8) min.
0.44 (11.2)
A 0.003 TIR
(0.08)
3.150
(80.00
3.077 (78.16)
3.075 (78.11)
+0.0005
-0.0003
+0.012 )
-0.007
0.551 +0.0003
-0.0001
(14.00 +0.008
-0.003 )
-A0.0014
(0.035)
M5 X 0.8 Tap X 0.39 (10.0) Min. DP. (4) holes
equally spaced on 3.937 (100.0) Diameter B. C.
Motor
APEX605
APEX606
APEX610
A Max
B ± 0.06 (1.5)
9.30 (236.2)
10.86 (275.8)
12.42 (315.4)
4.87 (123.7)
6.42 (163.1)
7.23 (183.6)
3.167 (80.44)
3.165 (80.39)
0.3932 (9.987)
0.3922 (9.962)
Motor
APEX605
APEX606
APEX610
C Max
3.14 (79.8)
3.14 (79.8)
3.42 (86.8)
D Max
2.56 (65.0)
2.56 (65.0)
2.62 (66.5)
0.197 (5.00)
0.196 (4.97)
Resolver and
Thermostat
Receptacle
Motor
Receptacle
C
0.433 (11.00)
0.429 (10.90)
D
KEYWAY DETAIL
+0.197
3.62 -0.000
(92.00 +5.0
-0.0 )
Square
ADD TO
MAX LENGTH
1.59
(40.3)
+0.36
Ø.276 +0.014
-0.000 (Ø7.00 -0.00 ) Dia. thru four holes equally
spaced on Ø3.937 (Ø100.00) Dia. B.C.
Dimensions in inches (mm)
BRAKE OPTION
APEX605, 606, and 610 Dimensions
Chapter 1. Installation
53
A 0.004 TIR
(0.10)
A
1.967 ± 0.02
(50.0 ± 0.5)
Max.
0.69 (17.5)
B
0.14 (3.50)
1.457 (37.00) min.
0.49 (12.5)
A 0.004 TIR
(0.10)
+0.0005
4.331 -0.0004
(110.00 +0.013
-0.009 )
4.006 (101.75)
4.004 (101.70)
0.9449
+0.0003
-0.0002
M5 X 0.8 Tap X 0.55 (14.0) Min. DP. (4) holes
equally spaced on 5.188 (130.0) Diameter B. C.
(Ø24.00 +0.009
-0.004 )
4.103 (104.22)
4.101 (104.17)
0.3932 (9.987)
0.3922 (9.962)
-AA Max
Motor
APEX620 12.55 (318.8)
APEX630 14.65 (372.1)
0.0016
(0.041)
Resolver and
Thermostat
Receptacle
3.98 ±0.08
(101.00 ±2.0)
B ± 0.08 (2.0)
8.30 (210.9)
10.41 (264.3)
0.3149 (8.000)
0.3135 (7.964)
Motor
Receptacle
3.04
(77.10)
0.787 (20.00)
0.780 (19.80)
KEYWAY DETAIL
+0.15
4.53 -0.00
(115.00 +3.8
-0.0 )
ADD TO
MAX LENGTH
1.91
(48.5)
Ø.369 - Ø.354 (Ø9.36 - 9.00) Dia. thru four holes equally
spaced on Ø5.118 (Ø130.00) Dia. B.C.
BRAKE OPTION
Dimensions in inches (mm)
APEX620, and 630 Dimensions
54
APEX615n Installation Guide
A 0.004 TIR
(0.10)
A
1.967 ± 0.02
(50.0 ± 0.5)
Max.
0.69 (17.5)
B
0.14 (3.50)
1.457 (37.00) min.
0.71 (18.0)
A 0.004 TIR
(0.10)
5.118
+0.0006
-0.0004
+0.014
-0.011
(130.00
5.006 (127.15)
5.004 (127.10)
)
0.9449
+0.0003
-0.0002
M5 X 0.8 Tap X 0.55 (14.0) Min. DP. (4) holes
equally spaced on 6.457 (164.0) Diameter B. C.
(Ø24.00 +0.009
-0.004 )
5.103 (129.62)
5.101 (129.57)
0.3932 (9.987)
0.3922 (9.962)
-AA Max
Motor
APEX635 11.78 (299.2)
APEX640 14.48 (367.8)
0.0016
(0.040)
Resolver and
Thermostat
Receptacle
5.23 ±0.08
(132.9 ±2.0)
B ± 0.08 (2.0)
5.47 (139.0)
8.17 (207.6)
0.3149 (8.000)
0.3135 (7.964)
Motor
Receptacle
0.787 (20.00)
0.780 (19.80)
3.93
(99.8)
KEYWAY DETAIL
+0.13
5.59 -0.00
(142.00 +3.3
-0.0 )
ADD TO
MAX LENGTH
1.91
(48.5)
Ø.433 (Ø11.00 ) Dia. thru four holes equally
spaced on Ø6.496 (Ø165.00) Dia. B.C.
BRAKE OPTION
Dimensions in inches (mm)
APEX635, and 640 Dimensions
Chapter 1. Installation
55
Motor Heatsinking
Performance of a servo motor is limited by the amount of current that can flow in the motor's coils without
causing the motor to overheat. Most of the heat in a brushless servo motor is dissipated in the stator - the outer
shell of the motor. The primary pathway through which you can remove the heat is through the motor's
mounting flange. Therefore, mount the motor with its flange in contact with a suitable heatsink.
Current foldback (I2T Limit) settings and APEX Series motor specifications assume that the motor is mounted
to a ten inch by ten inch aluminum plate, 1/2 inch thick (250mm x 250mm x 13mm). To get rated
performance in your application, you must mount the motor to a heatsink of at least the same thermal
capability. Mounting the motor to a smaller heatsink may result in decreased performance and a shorter service
life. Conversely, mounting the motor to a large heatsink can result in enhanced performance. You can also use
a fan to blow air across the motor for increased cooling, if you do not get enough cooling by conduction
through the face flange.
Coupling the Motor
Align the motor shaft and load as accurately as possible. In most applications, some misalignment is
unavoidable, due to tolerance buildups in components. However, excessive misalignment may degrade your
system’s performance. The three misalignment conditions, which can exist in any combination, are illustrated
below. The type of misalignment in your system will affect your choice of coupler (described below).
Aligned
Angular Misalignment
End Float
Parallel Misalignment
Combined Parallel & Angular Misalignment
Your mechanical system should be as stiff as possible. Because of the high torques and accelerations of servo
systems, the ideal coupling between a motor and load would be completely rigid. Rigid couplings require
perfect alignment, however, which can be difficult or impossible to achieve, as shown above. In real systems,
some misalignment is inevitable. Therefore, a certain amount of flexibility may be required in the system. Too
much flexibility can cause resonance problems, however.
The type of misalignment in your system will affect your choice of coupler.
Single-Flex Coupling
Use a single-flex coupling when you have angular misalignment only. Because a single-flex coupling is like a
hinge, one and only one of the shafts must be free to move in the radial direction without constraint. Do not
use a double-flex coupling in this situation: it will allow too much freedom and the shaft will rotate
eccentrically, which will cause large vibrations and catastrophic failure. Do not use a single-flex
coupling with a parallel misalignment: this will bend the shafts, causing excessive bearing loads and
premature failure.
56
APEX615n Installation Guide
Double-Flex Coupling
Use a double-flex coupling whenever two shafts are joined with parallel misalignment, or a combination of
angular and parallel misalignment (the most common situation).
Single-flex and double-flex couplings may or may not accept end play, depending on their design.
Rigid Coupling
Rigid couplings are generally not recommended, because they cannot compensate for any misalignment. They
should be used only if the motor or load is on some form of floating mounts that allow for alignment
compensation. Rigid couplings can also be used when the load is supported entirely by the motor’s bearings.
A small mirror connected to a motor shaft is an example of such an application.
Coupling Manufacturers
HUCO
70 Mitchell Blvd, Suite 201
San Rafael, CA 94903
(415) 492-0278
ROCOM CORP.
5957 Engineer Drive
Huntington Beach, CA 92649
(714) 891-9922
Chapter 1. Installation
57
What's Next?
By now, you should have completed the following tasks, as instructed earlier in this chapter:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Review the general specifications — see page 4.
Perform configuration/adjustments, as necessary — see pages 6-10.
Mount the APEX615n — see page 11.
Connect all electrical system components — see pages 16-46.
Test the installation — see pages 46-48.
Mount the motor and couple the load — see pages 49-57.
Program Your Motion Control Functions
You should now be ready to program your APEX615n for your application. Knowing your
system's motion control requirements, refer now to the 6000 Series Programmer's Guide for
descriptions of the APEX615n's software features and instructions on how to implement them
in your application. Be sure to keep the 6000 Series Software Reference at hand as a reference
for the 6000 Series command descriptions.
For assistance with your programming effort, we recommend that you use the programming
tools provided in Motion Architect for Windows (found in your ship kit). Additional powerful
programming and product interface tools are available (see below).
Motion Architect
Motion Architect® is a Microsoft® Windows™ based 6000 product programming tool
(included in your ship kit). Motion Architect provides these features:
• System configurator and code generator: Automatically generate controller code
for basic system set-up parameters (I/O definitions, feedback device operations, etc.).
• Program editor: Create blocks or lines of 6000 controller code, or copy portions of
code from previous files. You can save program editor files for later use in BASIC, C,
etc., or in the terminal emulator or test panel.
• Terminal emulator: Communicating directly with the APEX615n, you can type in
and execute controller code, transfer code files to and from the APEX615n.
• Test panel and program tester: You can create your own test panel to run your
programs and check the activity of I/O, motion, system status, etc. This can be
invaluable during start-ups and when fine tuning machine performance.
• On-line context-sensitive help and technical references: These on-line
resources provide help information about Motion Architect, as well as interactive access
to the contents of the 6000 Series Software Reference and the 6000 Series Programmer's
Guide.
Other Software
Tools Available
Motion Builder™. A Windows-based iconic programming interface that removes the
requirement to learn the 6000 programming language.
CompuCAM™. A CAD-to-Motion (CAM) program that allows you to easily translate DXF,
HP-GL, and G-Code files into 6000 Series Language motion programs. Windows environment.
DDE6000™. Facilitates data exchange between the APEX615n and Windows™ applications
that support the dynamic data exchange (DDE) protocol. NetDDE™ compatible.
Motion Toolbox™. A library of LabVIEW® virtual instruments (VIs) for programming and
monitoring the APEX615n. Available for Windows and Mac environments.
How To Order
To order these software packages, contact your local
Automation Technology Center (ATC) or distributor.
58
APEX615n Installation Guide
2
CHAP T E R T WO
Troubleshooting
IN THIS CHAPTER
•
Troubleshooting basics:
- Diagnostic LEDs for hardware problems
- Reducing Electrical Noise
- Error message and debug tools
- Technical support
•
Solutions to common problems
•
RS-232C troubleshooting
•
Faults caused by excessive regeneration
•
Current foldback
•
Offset balance adjustment
•
Aligning the resolver
•
Commutation test mode
•
Product return procedure
Troubleshooting Basics
When your system does not function properly (or as you expect it to operate), the first thing
that you must do is identify and isolate the problem. When you have accomplished this, you
can effectively begin to resolve the problem.
The first step is to isolate each system component and ensure that each component functions
properly when it is run independently. You may have to dismantle your system and put it
back together piece by piece to detect the problem. If you have additional units available, you
may want to exchange them with existing components in your system to help identify the
source of the problem.
Determine if the problem is mechanical, electrical, or software-related. Can you repeat or recreate the problem? Do not attempt to make quick rationalizations about problems. Random
events may appear to be related, but they are not necessarily contributing factors to your
problem. You must carefully investigate and decipher the events that occur before the
subsequent system problem.
You may be experiencing more than one problem. You must isolate and solve one problem at
a time. Log (document) all testing and problem isolation procedures. You may need to
review and consult these notes later. This will also prevent you from duplicating your testing
efforts.
If you are having difficulty isolating a problem be sure to document all occurrences of the
problem along with as much specific information, such as time of occurrence, APEX615n
status, and anything else that was happening when the problem occurred.
Once you have isolated a problem, take the necessary steps to resolve it. Refer to the problem
solutions contained in this chapter. If your system’s problem persists, contact Technical
Assistance at the numbers listed on the inside cover of this document.
Diagnostic LEDs for Hardware Problems
The APEX615n has a bank of nine light emitting diodes (LEDs) on its front panel. Use these
LEDs to isolate and identify hardware problems with the APEX615n.
The LED portion of the front panel is shown below. The Enable LED, when illuminated, is
green. All other LEDs are red when illuminated.
APEX6151
Enable
Disable
Bridge Fault
Drive Fault
Motor Fault
Over Voltage
I 2 T Limit
Regen Fault
Regen Active
If a problem arises with the APEX615n, first check the LEDs for an indication of the
problem’s origin. The next table explains situations that can illuminate each LED, and
provides the method to reset relevant fault conditions. Note that you should rectify the cause
of the fault before resetting the fault condition as noted in the table below; otherwise, the fault
is likely to reoccur.
60
APEX615n Installation Guide
LED
Description
How to reset the fault
(see Recovering from Faults
Latched (yes/no) below for additional details)
Enable
Indicates drive is enabled
no
Disable
Indicates drive is disabled
no
Issue the DRIVE1 command
Bridge Fault *
Power stage over-temperature
Power stage over-current
Motor short circuit
yes
yes
yes
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Drive Fault *
Control board over-temperature
Under-voltage (brownout)
yes
yes
Note 1
Note 2
Motor Fault *
Resolver not connected
Motor over-temperature
Motor thermostat not connected
yes
yes
yes
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Over Voltage Fault * Bus voltage exceeded 420VDC
yes
n/a
Note 1
I2T Limit
I2T limit. Drive is in foldback. Output is no
limited to continuous current setting.
Note 3
Regen Fault *
Excessive regeneration (external
regeneration resistor may be required)
yes
Note 1
Regen Active
Regeneration circuit active
(regeneration resistor is turned on, and
dissipating excess power)
no
Note 4
* When these faults occur, the 615n's output current is latched off.
Note 1 Activate drive RESET input on the DRIVE AUXILIARY connector (hold the input to less
than 1.0V for at least 20 milliseconds; reset begins upon release of the low voltage),
issue the DRESET command, or cycle power.
Note 2 When the bus voltage drops below 85VAC 120VDC the Drive Fault LED will latch,
indicating a under-voltage condition. The controller will then disable the drive.
When the bus voltage has recovered there are 3 ways to clear the drive fault: (1)
issue a reset via the drive reset input, (2) enter the DRESET command, or (3) enable
the drive with the DRIVE1 command.
Note 3 This fault condition is not latched. It indicates that the APEX615n is in current
foldback, with its output current limited to the continuous current level. An I2T
Limit usually indicates that something is wrong with your system—a mechanical
jam, the motor is undersized, the move is too aggressive for the motor, etc.
The drive may recover on its own, if the level of continuous current is low enough
to permit the motor to cool. Under some conditions, the drive may not recover on
its own—it may stay in current foldback. To recover, disable the drive with the
DRIVEØ command. Wait for the motor to cool before you re-enable the drive (DRIVE1
command) and resume operations.
CAUTION: Do not use the RESET input or RESET or DRESET commands to clear
the fault. If you do so, the protective circuit loses all information about motor
temperature. It assumes the motor operates from a cold start, and it may not protect
the motor from overheating if the motor is hot at the time the reset occurs.
The motor has less torque during an I2T Limit. If you configure your controller to
detect position errors (based on the maximum allowed position error set with the
SMPER command), then an I2T Limit will probably cause a position error fault. See
the Current Foldback section of this chapter.
Note 4 This is not a fault condition. When the LED turns on, it indicates that the internal
regeneration resistor is dissipating excess regenerated power. The LED will turn off
when the resistor stops dissipating power. If the APEX615n experiences excessive
regeneration, it will fault and the Regen Fault LED will illuminate; in this
situation, you may wish to consider installing an external regeneration resistor.
Chapter 2. Troubleshooting
61
Recovering from
Faults
Many of the fault conditions will shut down the APEX615n’s output current to the motor.
Before trying to restart your system, you should first solve the problem that caused the fault.
For example, if a short circuit in a motor cable caused a Drive Fault, the same fault will
probably occur when you restart the drive—unless you first fix the problem.
Most of the fault conditions are latched. Once the problem is fixed, the APEX615n will not
start up again on its own. You must first cycle power, or reset the drive/controller (see Notes
1 & 2 above).
To cycle power, remove AC power from the Control L1 and Control L2 terminals on the
APEX615n, then turn the power back on. Note that there is a dual voltage supply—one for
the internal drive/controller electronics, Control L1/L2, and one for the motor, L1/L2 (see
connection instructions in Chapter 2).
To reset the APEX615n, send a reset signal to the APEX615n’s RESET input, located on the
DRIVE AUXILIARY connector, or issue the DRESET command.
Reset the APEX615n
There are two ways to reset the APEX615n:
•
The RESET input is a hardware reset—it resets the drive functions within the
APEX615n. (To reset the drive, hold the reset input at a low voltage, less than 1.0V,
for at least 20 milliseconds. Reset will begin upon release of the low voltage.) NOTE:
An alternative is to issue the DRESET command.
• The reset command (RESET) is a software reset—it resets the controller functions within
the APEX615n.
The two reset functions are independent, and do not directly affect each other. This means that
if you use the RESET input or the DRESET command to reset the drive, the controller will
remain up and running. Similarly, if you issue a RESET command to return the controller to
power-up conditions, the drive functions will not automatically be reset (e.g., the drive will
retain information about motor temperature—see Note 3 above).
Reducing Electrical Noise
For detailed information on reducing electrical noise, refer to Appendix B.
Error Messages and Debug Tools
A list of all possible error messages, and their causes, is provided in the 6000 Series
Software Reference. For instructions on using the APEX615n’s program debug tools (Trace
mode, Single-Step mode, I/O activation, bad command detection, etc.) refer to Program Debug
Tools in the Programming Guide section of the 6000 Series Software Reference.
Technical Support
If you cannot solve your system problems using this documentation, contact your local
Automation Technology Center (ATC) or distributor for assistance. If you need to talk to our
in-house application engineers, please contact us at the numbers listed on the inside cover of this
manual. (These numbers are also provided when you issue the HELP command.)
NOTE: Compumotor maintains a BBS that contains the latest software upgrades and latebreaking product documentation, a FaxBack system, and a tech support email address.
62
APEX615n Installation Guide
Common Problems & Solutions
The following table presents some guidelines to help you isolate problems with your motion
control system. Some common symptoms are listed along with a list of possible causes and
remedies.
•
•
•
•
Problem
Erratic operation
Look for the symptom that most closely resembles what you are experiencing.
Look through the list of possible causes so that you better understand what may be
preventing proper operation.
Start from the top of the list of remedies and use the suggested procedures to isolate the
problem.
Refer to other sections of the manual for more information on APEX615n set up,
system connections, and feature implementation. You may also need to refer to the
6000 Series Software Reference.
Cause
1. Electrical Noise
2. Improper wiring
Solution
1. Reduce electrical noise or move the APEX615n away from noise
source (refer also to Appendix A)
2. Check wiring for opens, shorts, and mis-wired connections
LEDs:
DISABLE is red
1. Shutdown input active
2. Position error
1. Issue DRIVE1 command
2. Issue DRIVE1 command
LEDs:
ENABLE LED is off
1. No AC power
1. Check AC power
Missing counts from
feedback device
1. Improper wiring
2. Feedback device slipping
3. Feedback device too hot
1. Check wiring
2. Check and tighten feedback device coupling
3. Reduce encoder temperature with heatsink, thermal insulator, etc.
4a. Shield wiring (refer also to Appendix A)
4b. Use encoder with differential outputs
5. Peak encoder frequency must be below 1.2 MHz post-quadrature;
peak frequency must account for velocity ripple
4. Electrical noise
5. Feedback device frequency too high
No Motion
1. ENABLE LED off
2. Limits engaged
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Improper wiring
Load is jammed
No torque from motor
Maximum position error exceeded
ENABLE IN input is not grounded to
GND
1. See Enable LED problems above.
2a. Move load off of limits or disable limits with LHØ
2b. If using soft limits, make sure LSCW>LSCCW
3. Check enable, fault, and limit connections.
4. Remove power and clear jam
5. See problem: No Torque
6. Check to see if TAS bit #23 is set, and issue the DRIVE1 command
7. Ground ENABLE IN to GND and reset or cycle power
Chapter 2. Troubleshooting
63
Problem
No RS-232C
Communication
No Torque/Force
Power-up Program does
not execute
Cause
1. Improper RS-232C Interface or
communication parameters
2. RS-232C disabled
3. In daisy chain, unit may not be set to
proper address
1. Improper wiring
2. No power to motor
3. Shutdown issued
1. ENABLE IN input is not grounded to
GND
2. STARTP program is not defined
Solution
1. See RS-232C Troubleshooting section
2. Enable RS-232C with the E command (all units if daisy-chained)
3. Verify proper application of the ADDR command
1. Check wiring to the motor, as well as other system wiring
2. Check power at motor
3. Enable drive with DRIVE1
1. Ground ENABLE IN to GND and reset or cycle power
2. Check the response to the STARTP command. If no program is
reported, define the STARTP program and reset
Program access denied:
1. Program security function has been
receive the message
enabled (INFNCi-Q) and the
*ACCESS DENIED when
program access input has not been
trying to use the DEF, DEL,
activated
ERASE, INFNC, or
MEMORY commands
1a.
Program execution: stops
at the INFEN1 command
1. INFEN1 enables drive fault
monitoring, but the drive fault level
(DRFLVL) command is set
incorrectly for the drive being used.
1. Issue the correct DRFLVL command for your drive (refer to the
DRFLVL command)
Program execution: the
first time a program is run,
the move distances are
incorrect. Upon
downloading the program
the second time, move
distances are correct.
1. Scaling parameters were not issued
when the program was downloaded;
or scaling parameters have been
changed since the program was
defined
1. Issue the scaling parameters (SCALE1, SCLA, SCLD, SCLV) before
saving any programs
Programmable inputs not
working
1. IN-P or AUXP (input pullup) not
connected
1a.
2. If external power supply is used, the
grounds must be connected together
3. Improper wiring
1b.
Activate the assigned program access input, perform your
programming changes, then deactivate the program access input.
Refer to the instructions in the INFNC command description in the
6000 Series Software Reference
When inputs will be pulled down to 0V by an external device,
connect IN-P and/or AUX-P to +5V or to another positive supply
1b. When inputs will be pulled up to 5V or higher by an external device,
connect IN-P and/or AUX-P to 0V
2. Connect external power supply’s ground to ISO GND
3. Check wiring for opens, shorts, and mis-wired connections
1. Output connected such that it must
source current (pull to positive
voltage)
2. OUT-P not connected to +5V or
other positive voltage source
3. If external power supply is used, the
grounds must be connected together
4. Improper wiring
1. If external power supply is used, the
grounds must be connected together.
2. Improper wiring.
1. Outputs are open-collector and can only sink current–change wiring.
Wrong Direction—
Stable
Wrong Direction—
Unstable
1. Phase of encoder reversed
1. Switch CHA+ with CHA- connection from APEX615n to encoder
1. Not tuned properly
2. Phase of encoder reversed
1. Refer to Chapter 4 for tuning instructions
2. Switch CHA+ with CHA- connection from APEX615n to encoder
Wrong Speed or Distance
1. Wrong resolution setting
1.
Programmable outputs not
working
Trigger, home, or end-oftravel inputs not working.
2. Wrong scaling value
64
APEX615n Installation Guide
2. Connect OUT-P to +5V supplied or other voltage in system
3. Connect external power supply’s ground to ground ISO GND
4. Check wiring for opens, shorts, and mis-wired connections
1. Connect external power supply's ground to APEX615n's ground .
2.a. Check wiring for opens, shorts, and mis-wired connections.
2.b. When inputs are pulled down to 0V by an external device, connect
AUX-P to +5V supplied or to an external +5-24V supply (but not to
both).
2.c. When inputs are pulled to 5-24V by external device, connect AUX-P
to 0V.
2.d. Make sure a 5-24V power source is connected to the V_I/O terminal.
Encoder feedback: Check and set resolution on APEX615n with
ERES set to 4096.
2. Check the scaling parameters (SCALE1, SCLA, SCLD, SCLV)
Troubleshooting Serial Communication Problems
General Notes
• Power up your computer or terminal BEFORE you power up the APEX615n.
• Make sure the serial interface is connected as instructed on page 25. Shield the cable to earth
ground at one end only. Check to make sure you are using Iso GND as your reference, not
GND. The maximum RS-232 cable length is 50 feet (15.25 meters).
• RS-232: Handshaking must be disabled. Most software packages allow you to do this.
You can also disable handshaking by jumpering some terminals on the computer's/
terminal's serial port: connect RTS to CTS (usually pins 4 and 5) and connect DSR to
DTR (usually pins 6 and 20).
• RS-485: Make sure internal DIP switches and jumpers are configured as shown on pg. 10.
Test the Interface
1.
Power up the computer or terminal and launch the terminal emulator.
2.
Power up the APEX615n. A power-up message (similar to the following) should be
displayed, followed by a prompt (>):
∗PARKER COMPUMOTOR 615n SERVO CONTROLLER
∗RP240 CONNECTED
>
3.
Type “TREV” and press ENTER key. (The TREV command reports software revision.)
The screen should now look as follows (if not, see Problem/Remedy table below).
∗PARKER COMPUMOTOR 6151 SERVO CONTROLLER
∗RP240 CONNECTED
>TREV
∗TREV92-014016-01-4.1 6151
Problem
Remedy (based on the possible causes)
No Response
• COM port not enabled for 6000 language communication.
If RS-232 connected to COM 1: issue “PORT1” and “DRPCHKØ” commands.
If RS-232 connected to COM 2: issue “PORT2” and “DRPCHKØ” commands.
If RS-485 connected to COM 2: issue “PORT2” and “DRPCHKØ” commands.
• RS-232: Echo may be disabled; enable with the ECHO1 command.
• If using an RS-232 connection between the host computer and master APEX615n
connected to multiple APEX615ns in an RS-485 multi-drop, make sure the master
has these settings in the order given (place these settings in STARTP program):
PORT1 (select RS-232 port, COM1, for configuration)
ECHO3 (echo to both COM ports)
PORT2 (select RS-485 port, COM2, for configuration)
ECHO2 (echo to the other COM port, COM1)
• Faulty wiring. See instructions on page 25. RS-485: verify internal DIP switch
and jumper settings on page 10. Also check for shorts or opens.
• Is the cable or computer/terminal bad? Here's a test:
1. Disconnect the serial cable from the APEX615n end only.
2. Connect cable's Rx and Tx lines together (echoes characters back to host).
3. Issue the TREV command. If nothing happens, the cable or computer/terminal
may be faulty.
Garbled Characters
• Verify setup: 9600 baud ,8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity; RS-232: Full duplex;
RS-485: Half duplex .
• RS-485: Transmission line not properly terminated. See page 10 for internal DIP
switch and jumper settings. See page 25 for connections and calculating
termination resistors (if not using the internal resistors via internal DIP switches).
• Faulty wiring. See instructions on page 25. RS-485: verify internal DIP switch
and jumper settings on page 10. Also check for shorts or opens.
Double Characters
• Your terminal emulator is set to half-duplex; set it to full-duplex.
Chapter 2. Troubleshooting
65
Faults Caused by Excessive Regeneration
The APEX615n’s protection circuitry monitors regeneration activity, and can trigger one of
two fault conditions if excess regeneration occurs. Exceeding the regeneration resistor’s
continuous power rating will cause a Regen Fault. Exceeding the resistor’s peak power rating
will cause an Overvoltage Fault. Either of these faults will shut down the APEX615n, to
safeguard the system.
Important specifications for the regeneration circuit are:
Nominal Operating
Voltage:
(based on AC input)
Regen Resistor
Turns ON:
Overvoltage
Fault
Turns ON:
APEX6151
170VDC-340VDC
390VDC
420VDC
APEX6152
340VDC
390VDC
420VDC
APEX6154
340VDC
390VDC
420VDC
Dissipation ratings for the internal regeneration resistor are:
Continuous Power
Dissipation Rating
Peak Power
Dissipation Rating
APEX6151
50 watts
1 KW
APEX6152
80 watts
3 KW
APEX6154
90watts
6 KW
Details regarding the Regen Fault and overvoltage fault are explained below.
Regen Fault
A regen fault indicates that the continuous power dissipation capabilities of the regeneration
resistor have been exceeded.
When the resistor is on and dissipating power, its temperature rises. When the resistor turns
off, its temperature falls. The temperature is determined by the average power dissipation, over
time, and is affected by such things as the length of time the resistor is on, how much power
it dissipates while it is on, and the length of time it is off. During a repetitive move profile,
the resistor’s temperature will increase during deceleration, when regeneration occurs. The
temperature will decrease after regeneration stops—when the motor is accelerating, slewing, or
at rest.
If the average power dissipated in the resistor is less than 40W , the resistor’s temperature will
stay below damaging levels. If the average power dissipated is greater than these values, the
resistor temperature may rise to a level that can permanently damage the resistor. Before
temperatures reach this level, however, the regen fault circuit will shut down the drive. The
purpose of the regen fault is to protect the regeneration resistor from damage due to high
temperatures.
66
APEX615n Installation Guide
CAUTION
Repeatedly cycling
power or resetting the
APEX615n to clear
regeneration faults
may damage the
regeneration resistor.
You can clear the regen fault by cycling power or by resetting the drive. To cycle power, turn
off AC power to the to the Control L1/L2 terminals on the AC power connector, then turn the
power back on; however, if the resistor has not had adequate time to cool, and the conditions
leading to the regen fault persist, you may damage the regen resistor by cycling
power repeatedly. Information about continuous power dissipation in the regen resistor is
lost when power is cycled. To reset the drive, activate the RESET input on the DRIVE
AUXILIARY connector (hold the input to less than 1.2V for at least 20 milliseconds; reset
begins upon release of the low voltage), or issue the DRESET (Drive Reset) command.
Overvoltage Fault
An overvoltage fault indicates that the peak power dissipation capabilities of the regeneration
resistor have been exceeded.
Regeneration causes the voltage on the DC power bus to rise. The regeneration resistor will
turn on when the bus voltage reaches 390VDC. Peak power dissipation occurs at the moment
the resistor turns on. The peak power value is determined by the size of the resistor, and the
voltage across it:
APEX10 Peak Power =
2
V 2 (390VDC )
=
≈ 1000W (1 KW )
R
150Ω
As soon as the resistor turns on, regenerated power begins to be dissipated in the resistor, and,
in most applications, bus voltage drops. When the voltage falls below 375VDC, the resistor
turns off. If the motor is still producing regenerated power, the bus voltage will rise again,
the resistor will turn on at 390VDC, and the cycle will repeat over and over until the motor no
longer produces enough power to turn on the regeneration resistor.
However, some applications can regenerate more than 1 KW of peak power. Too much peak
power can overwhelm the regeneration circuit—the bus voltage will continue to rise, even
while the resistor is on. To protect the system from excessive voltages, an overvoltage circuit
monitors the bus voltage, and triggers the overvoltage fault if the voltage exceeds 420VDC.
An overvoltage fault will shut down the drive. The red LED labeled Over Voltage, located on
the APEX6151’s front panel, will be illuminated. You can clear the fault by cycling power, or
by pulling the RESET input low (RESET is located on the DRIVE AUXILIARY connector).
Chapter 2. Troubleshooting
67
Current Foldback (I2T Limit)
The purpose of the current foldback circuit is to protect the motor from overheating due to
prolonged high currents. The eight switches of DIP Switch#2 are used to set the parameters for
the current foldback circuit. These parameters are:
•
PEAK CURRENT—the highest current that the APEX615n will produce. Peak
current can be set between 6.5A and 16.0 A for the APEX6151, between 9.0A and
24.0A for the APEX6152, and between 15A and 40A for the APEX6154..
• CONTINUOUS CURRENT—the APEX615n reduces its current to this level when
it goes into current foldback. Continuous current can be set between 1.8A and 8.0A,
between 3.0A and 12.0A for the APEX6152, and between 5A and 20A for the
APEX6154..
• TIME CONSTANT—the motor’s thermal time constant, which is a physical
parameter usually specified by the motor’s manufacturer. The time constant can be set
between 10 minutes and 40 minutes on the APEX615n.
The APEX615n uses an internal circuit to model the motor’s thermal behavior, and predict
motor temperature. Heat dissipated in the motor’s windings is directly proportional to I2, the
square of the motor current, and the length of time the current flows.
The APEX615n monitors motor current, and uses its internal microprocessor to simulate a
capacitor being charged by the motor current. The result is a number, similar to voltage on a
capacitor, that represents an average, over time, of the motor’s temperature.
The following equation gives an approximate time before foldback occurs, for a motor that
operates from a cold start, when Iactual > Icontinuous.
2

 I
  

time( minutes) = Time Constant  − ln 1 −  continuous   
  Iactual   


Three variables affect this equation:
•
Icontinuous is the continuous current (set by DIP switches)
• Time Constant is the motor’s time constant (set by DIP switches)
• Iactual is the current that actually flows in the motor. It can be as low as Ø amps, or
as high as the peak current (which was set by DIP switches).
The shortest time until foldback occurs will be when Iactual = Ipeak. Notice that this can be
much shorter than the time constant in the equation above.
When current foldback occurs, the APEX615n clamps its output current at the Icontinuous level,
and illuminates the LED labeled I2T Limit, located on the drive’s front panel. The drive does
not put out a fault signal on its fault output. However, because torque will be reduced as a
result of the lower motor current, excess position or following error may result.
To recover from current foldback, there are three options:
•
•
•
68
WAIT—allow a period of time to pass for the motor to cool. Usually, several minutes
will be required.
REDUCE COMMAND INPUT—lower the commanded current to a level below
continuous current. This will bleed off the voltage on the simulated capacitor, and clear
the foldback condition.
RESET—Pull the RESET input low (the RESET input is located on the APEX615n’s
DRIVE AUXILIARY connector). An alternative is to issue the DRESET command or cycle
power on Control L1/L2. This will reset the drive, and clear the foldback condition.
However, this method is not recommended if the motor is actually hot, because the
motor temperature information in the controller will be lost. The motor should be
allowed to cool before the APEX615n is reset, and operations continue. (RESET input
and DRESET command resets drive functions; RESET command resets controller.
APEX615n Installation Guide
Offset Balance Adjustments
The offset balance potentiometer (offset pot) adjusts the offset voltage of the APEX615n’s
internal command signal. The offset is zeroed at the factory, with the pot set near the middle of
its range of travel. Normally, you do not need to adjust it. However, if you suspect the pot’s
setting has been altered, the procedure below will explain how to adjust it to zero the offset
balance.
NOTE
This procedure—adjusting the offset balance potentiometer—was performed at the factory. If
yours is a new APEX615n, you do not need to perform this step. You can use the default
factory settings.
A small offset will not normally cause a problem—the APEX615n’s internal controller can
automatically compensate for any offset. If the offset is excessive, though, you may notice
that the motor reaches a higher speed in one direction than the other. If this causes a problem
in your application, follow the procedure below to zero the offset.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the load from the motor. The motor’s shaft must be free to turn.
Turn on AC power to the APEX615n.
Disable hardwired limits: (LHØ)
Disable monitoring of maximum allowable position error: (SMPERØ)
Set all servo gains to zero: (SGPØ, SGIØ, SGVØ, SGAFØ, SGVFØ)
CAUTION
If there is little or no load on the motor shaft, any internal offset may cause an acceleration to a
high speed.
6. Set the commanded offset voltage to zero: (SOFFSØ)
7. Enable the drive with the DRIVE1 command.
8. With all gains set to zero, the APEX615n is now operating open loop. Any motion of
the motor shaft is due to an internal offset. You can measure the offset by connecting a
digital volt meter (DVM) to the Torque Cmd Test Point test point, as shown below.
Connect the probe’s negative lead to any of the GND terminals on the Drive Auxiliary
connector.
Torque Cmd
The offset voltage should be
Test Point
very close to ØV. If it is not,
zero the offset by turning the
Offset Balance pot. This is a
15-turn pot, located on the
front panel of the APEX615n.
Offset
Balance
The null position—where the
voltage approaches zero, and
Tach Output
Calibration
the motor stops turning—will
be near the center of the pot’s
Enable
range of travel.
Disable
APEX6151
Bridge Fault
When you have zeroed the offset voltage, and the motor stops turning, this procedure is
complete.
Chapter 2. Troubleshooting
69
Tachometer Output Calibration
Use the Tachometer Output Calibration potentiometer to precisely calibrate the APEX615n
Controller/Drive's tachometer output, while monitoring the actual tachometer output at the
Tach Out pin on the Drive Auxiliary connector. For example, a commanded velocity of 4000
rpm should produce Tach Out signal of 4 volts. Adjust the potentiometer until the Tach Out
signal is measured at 4 volts.
Aligning the Resolver
You can operate the APEX615n in alignment mode if you need to align your motor’s resolver.
This is a rarely used feature. Resolvers on APEX Series motors are aligned at the factory, and
need no further adjustments. It is usually not necessary to align resolvers on other
manufacturer’s motors.
However, if you need to replace the resolver on a motor, if you have a motor with unknown
characteristics, or if poor speed/torque performance leads you to suspect that the resolver is out
of alignment, you can follow the procedure below.
To align the resolver, perform the following steps.
1. Turn OFF AC power to the APEX615n and remove the load from the motor. The
motor’s shaft must be free to turn.
2. Turn DIP Switch#3, position 2, ON. Turn ON AC power to the APEX615n.
3. Set all servo gains to zero [SGPØ, SGIØ, SGVØ, SGAFØ, & SGVFØ].
4. For 2-pole-pair motor: Set offset voltage to negative one half volt [SOFFS-Ø.5].
For 3-pole-pair motor: Set offset voltage to positive one half volt [SOFFSØ.5].
5. Enable the APEX615n drive [DRIVE1]. The motor shaft should turn and lock into
position. If it does not lock into position, increase SOFFS slightly. Use only enough
current in the motor to maintain holding torque. Excess current may cause motor
overheating.
6. With the motor shaft locked in the alignment position, loosen the screws on the
resolver so that it can turn.
7. Slowly rotate the resolver while you observe the APEX615n’s front panel LEDs. When
the resolver is in the correct position, both the MOTOR FAULT and the I2T LIMIT LEDs
will be illuminated. When the resolver is close to the correct position, only one of the
LEDs will be illuminated. When the rotor is not close to the correct position, no LED
will be illuminated.
8. With the resolver in the correct position (both LEDs illuminated), tighten the screws on
the resolver so that its case can no longer rotate.
9. Turn off AC power, and turn DIP Switch#3, position 2, OFF.
Resolver alignment is now complete. You can resume normal operations.
While the APEX615n is in alignment mode, it commutates current as follows:
•
•
70
For 2–pole motors:
For 3–pole motors:
APEX615n Installation Guide
Current out of Phase B and into Phase C
Two equal currents out of Phases B and C. Both
currents into Phase A
Commutation Test Mode
You can operate the APEX615n in commutation test mode to help identify and isolate
problems. When it runs in commutation test mode, the APEX615n does not use any motor
feedback information for commutation. It ignores the resolver or the Hall effect sensor input,
and commutates the motor in an open loop fashion at one revolution per second. The current it
sends to the motor will be proportional to the internal command voltage.
You can use commutation test mode to verify that your APEX615n is commutating properly,
and that the motor phases are wired correctly.
To operate in commutation test mode:
1.
2.
3
4.
Turn off AC power to the APEX615n.
Turn DIP Switch#3, Position#3, ON.
Turn on AC power to the APEX615n.
The APEX615n should begin commutating the motor clockwise at the following
speeds:
• 1 rps
(for 2-pole motors)
• 2/3 rps (for 3-pole motors)
5. Depending upon your application, you may need to remove the load from the motor, or
adjust the internal command voltage with the SOFFS command to get adequate motor
current. You may also need to set the servo gains to zero (SGPØ, SGIØ, SGVØ,
SGAFØ & SGVFØ)
Returning the APEX615n
Step 1
Record the serial number and the model number of the defective unit, and secure a purchase
order number to cover repair costs in the event the unit is determined by the manufacturers to
be out of warranty.
Step 2
Before you return the unit, have someone from your organization with a technical
understanding of the APEX615n system and its application include answers to the following
questions:
•
•
•
•
Step 3
What is the extent of the failure/reason for return?
How long did it operate?
Did any other items fail at the same time?
What was happening when the unit failed (e.g., installing the unit, cycling power,
starting other equipment, etc.)?
• How was the product configured (in detail)?
• Which, if any, cables were modified and how?
• With what equipment is the unit interfaced?
• What was the application?
• What was the system environment (temperature, enclosure, spacing, contaminants,
etc.)?
• What upgrades, if any, are required (hardware, software, user guide)?
Call for return authorization. Refer to the Technical Assistance phone numbers provided on
the inside front cover of this document. The support personnel will also provide shipping
guidelines.
Chapter 2. Troubleshooting
71
Appendix A
Servo Tuning
In a Hurry?
We strongly recommend tuning the APEX615n before attempting to execute
any motion functions. If you must execute motion quickly (e.g., for testing purposes),
you should at least complete this appendix’s Controller Tuning Procedure and find a
proportional feedback gain that gives a stable response for your system. Then you can proceed
to execute your motion functions. Later on, you should read through this entire Servo Tuning
appendix and follow its procedures to ensure your system is properly tuned.
Servo System Terminology
This section gives you an overall understanding of the principles and the terminology used in
tuning the APEX615n Servo Controller/Drive.
Servo Tuning Terminology
The APEX615n uses a digital control algorithm to control and maintain the position and
velocity. The digital control algorithm consists of a set of numerical equations used to
periodically (once every servo sampling period) calculate the value of the control
signal output. The numerical terms of the equations consist of the current commanded and
actual position values (plus several values from the previous sampling period) and a set of
control parameters. Each control parameter, commonly called a gain, has a specific function
(see Servo Control Techniques later in this chapter). Tuning is the process of selecting and
adjusting these gains to achieve optimal servo performance.
When this control algorithm is used, the whole servo system is a closed-loop system (see
diagram below). It is called closed loop because the control algorithm accounts for both the
command (position, velocity, tension, etc.) and the feedback data (from the resolver,
encoder, or ANI input); therefore, it forms a closed loop of information flow.
When all gains are set to zero, the digital control algorithm is disabled. During system setup
or troubleshooting, it may be desirable to disable the algorithm and use the SOFFS command
to directly control the motor current; then you can test the drive/motor operation independently
from the controller.
Closed Loop System
Offset
Command
Digital
Control
Algorithm
Control
Signal
Analog Command =
Control Signal + Offset
Drive
Motor
Load
Feedback Device:
Resolver, Encoder,
or ANI Input
Feedback Data
Servo Algorithm Disabled
SOFFS
Offset
Drive Command = Offset
Drive
Motor
Load
Feedback Device:
Resolver, Encoder,
or ANI Input
Internally, the APEX615n has two main sections—a controller section and a drive section.
The controller accepts a motion command, and uses its digital control algorithm to calculate a
digital control signal. This digital value is sent from the digital signal processor (DSP ) to the
digital-to-analog converter (DAC). The DAC has an analog output range of -10V to +10V.
The DAC’s output, an analog control signal, is sent to the APEX615n’s drive section. The
drive produces motor current that is proportional to the voltage level of the analog signal.
It is possible that the digital control signal calculated by the control algorithm can exceed the
±10V limit. When this happens, the analog output will stay, or saturate, at the maximum
limit until the position error changes such that the control algorithm calculates a control
signal less than the limit. This phenomenon of reaching the output limit is called
controller output saturation. When saturation occurs, increasing the gains does not
help improve performance since the DAC is already operating at its maximum level.
Position Variable Terminology
In a servo system, there are two types of time-varying (value changes with time) position
information used by the controller for control purposes: commanded position and actual
position. You can use this information to determine if the system is positioning as you
expect.
74
APEX615n Installation Guide
Commanded
Position
The commanded position is calculated by the motion profile routine based on the
acceleration (A, AA), deceleration (AD, ADA), velocity (V) and distance (D) command values and
it is updated every servo sampling period. Therefore, the commanded position is the intended
position at any given point of time. To view the commanded position, use the TPC (Transfer
Commanded Position) command; the response represents the commanded position at the
instant the command is received.
When this user guide refers to the commanded position, it means the calculated time-varying
commanded position, not the distance (D) command. Conversely, when this user guide refers
to the position setpoint, it means the final intended distance specified with the distance (D)
command. The following plot is a typical profile of the commanded position in preset (MCØ)
mode.
Position
Setpoint
Profile
Complete
Commanded
Position
Distance
(D)
Acceleration
Constant
Velocity
Deceleration
Time
Actual Position
The other type of time-varying position information is the actual position; that is, the
actual position of the motor (or load) measured with the feedback device (resolver, encoder or
ANI input). Since this is the position achieved when the drive responds to the commanded
position, we call the overall picture of the actual position over time the position response
(see further discussion under Servo Response Terminology).
To view the actual position, use the TFB (Transfer Position of Feedback Device) command;
the response represents the actual position at the instant the command is received. The goal of
tuning the servo system is to get the actual position to track the commanded position as
closely as possible.
The difference between the commanded position and actual position is the position error.
To view the position error, use the TPER (Transfer Position Error) command; the response
represents the position error at the instant the command is received. When the motor is not
moving, the position error at that time is called the steady-state position error (see
definition of steady-state under Servo Response Terminology). If a position error occurs when
the motor is moving, it is called the position tracking error.
In some cases, even when the system is properly tuned, the position error can still be quite
significant due to a combination of factors such as the desired profile, the motor’s limitations,
the dynamic characteristics of the system, etc. For example, if the value of the velocity (V)
command is higher than the maximum velocity the motor can physically achieve, then when
it is commanded to travel at this velocity, the actual position will always lag behind the
commanded position and a position error will accumulate, no matter how high the gains are.
Appendix A
75
Servo Response Terminology
Stability
The first objective of tuning is to stabilize the system. The formal definition of system
stability is that when a bounded input is introduced to the system, the output of the system
is also bounded. What this means to a motion control system is that if the system is stable,
then when the position setpoint is a finite value, the final actual position of the system is also
a finite value.
On the other hand, if the system is unstable, then no matter how small the position setpoint
or how little a disturbance (motor torque variation, load change, noise from the feedback
device, etc.) the system receives, the position error will increase continuously (and
exponentially in almost all cases.) In practice, when the system experiences instability, the
actual position will oscillate in an exponentially diverging fashion as shown in the drawing
below. The definition here might contradict what some might perceive. One common
perception shared by many is that whenever there is oscillation, the system is unstable.
However, if the oscillation finally diminishes (damps out), even if it takes a long time, the
system is still considered stable. The reason for this clarification is to avoid misinterpretation
of what this user guide describes in the following sections.
The following table lists, describes, and illustrates the six basic types of position responses.
The primary difference among these responses is due to damping, which is the suppression
(or cancellation) of oscillation.
Response
Unstable
Description
Instability causes the position to
oscillate in an exponentially diverging
fashion.
Profile (position/time)
Position
Position Response
Types
A highly damped, or over-damped,
system gives a smooth but slower
response.
Under-damped
A slightly damped, or under-damped,
system gives a slightly oscillatory
response.
Critically damped
A critically-damped response is the
most desirable because it optimizes
the trade-off between damping and
speed of response.
Position
Oscillatory
An oscillatory response is
characterized by sustained position
oscillations of equal amplitude.
Position
Over-damped
Position
Time
Position
Time
Time
Time
Chattering
Chattering is a high-frequency, lowamplitude oscillation which is usually
audible.
Position
Time
Time
Performance
Measurements
When you investigate the plot of the position response versus time, there are a few
measurements that you can make to quantitatively assess the performance of the servo:
• Overshoot – the measurement of the maximum magnitude that the actual position
exceeds the position setpoint. It is usually measured in terms of the percentage of the
setpoint value.
• Rise Time – the time it takes the actual position to pass the setpoint.
• Settling Time – the time between when the commanded position reaches the setpoint
and the actual position settles within a certain percentage of the position setpoint. (Note
the settling time definition here is different from that of a control engineering text book,
but the goal of the performance measurement is still intact.)
76
APEX615n Installation Guide
These three measurements are made before or shortly after the motor stops moving. When it
is moving to reach and settle to the setpoint, we call such a period of time the transient.
When it is not moving, it is defined as steady-state.
A typical stable position response plot in preset mode (MCØ) is shown below.
Settling Time
Target Zone Mode
Settling Band
Setpoint
Setpoint
Commanded
Position
Position
Overshoot
Steady State
Position Error
Actual
Position
Rise Time
Transient
Steady State
Time
6000 Series Servo Commands
NOTE
The following list briefly describes each servo-related 6000 Series command. More
detailed information can be found in the rest of this chapter and within each command’s
description in the 6000 Series Software Reference .
Command
Title
Brief Description (detailed descriptions in 6000 Series Software Reference)
SFB
Select Servo Feedback Source
Selects the servo feedback transducer. You can select resolver, encoder, or ANI
feedback. (SFB4, resolver, is the default selection.)
SGAF
Acceleration Feedforward Gain
Sets the acceleration feedforward gain in the PIV&Fa servo algorithm.
SGENB
Servo Gain Set Enable
Enables a previously-saved set of PIV&F gains. A set of gains (specific to the current
feedback source selected with the SFB command) is saved using the SGSET command.
SGI
Set Integral Feedback Gain
Sets the integral gain in the PIV&F servo algorithm.
SGILIM
Set Integral Windup Limit
Sets a limit on the correctional control signal that results from the integral gain action
trying to compensate for a position error that persists too long.
SGP
Proportional Feedback Gain
Sets the proportional gain in the PIV&F servo algorithm.
SGSET
Save a Set of Servo Gains
Saves the presently-defined set of PIV&F gains as a particular gain set (specific to the
current feedback source). Up to 5 gain sets can be saved and enabled at any point in a
move profile, allowing different gains at different points in the profile.
SGV
Set Velocity Feedback Gain
Sets the velocity gain in the PIV&F servo algorithm.
SGVF
Velocity Feedforward Gain
Sets the velocity feedforward gain in the PIV&Fv servo algorithm.
SMPER
Maximum Allowable Position Error
Sets the maximum allowable error between the commanded position and the actual
position as indicated by the feedback device. If the error exceeds this limit, the APEX615n
shuts down power output to the motor. The motor will freewheel to a stop. You can enable
the ERROR command to continually check for this error condition, and when it occurs to
branch to a programmed response defined in the ERRORP program.
SOFFS
Servo Control Signal Offset
Sets an offset to the commanded analog output voltage, which is sent to the drive system.
SSFR
Servo Frequency Ratio
Sets the ratio between the update rate of the move trajectory and the update rate of the servo
action. The intermediate position setpoints calculated by the trajectory generator is updated
at a slower rate then the servo position correction. This command allows you to optimize
this for your application. The default setting (SSF4) is sufficient for most applications.
Appendix A
77
When using the Target Zone Mode, enabled with the STRGTE command, the actual
position and actual velocity must be within the target zone (that is, within the distance zone
defined by STRGTD and within the velocity zone defined by STRGTV). If the motor/load
does not settle into the target zone before the timeout period set by STRGTT, the
APEX615n detects an error.
To prevent subsequent commands/moves from being executed when this error condition
occurs, you must enable the ERROR command to continually check for this error
condition, and when it occurs to branch to a programmed response defined in the ERRORP
program. Otherwise, subsequent commands/moves can be executed regardless of the
actual position and velocity.
This feature is explained in greater detail later in the Target Zone section.
STRGTE
STRGTD
STRGTV
STRGTT
Target Zone Mode Enable
Target Zone Distance
Target Zone Velocity
Target Zone Timeout Period
TFB and
[ FB ]
Position of Servo Feedback Devices Transfers [or assigns/compares] the actual position of the transducer selected for
feedback (see SFB).
TDAC and
[ DAC ]
Value of DAC Output
Transfers [or assigns/compares] the output from the APEX615n’s digital-to-analog
converter. This is the analog control signal output to the APEX615n’s internal drive.
TGAIN
Transfer Servo Gains
Transfers the currently active set of PIV&F gains. The servo gain set reported represents
the last gain values specified with the individual servo gain commands (SGI, SGP, SGV,
SGAF, and SGVF), or the last gain set enabled with the SGSET command.
TPC and
[ PC ]
Position Commanded
Transfers [or assigns/compares] the commanded position (intermediate position setpoint).
TPER and
[ PER ]
Position Error
Transfers [or assigns/compares] the error between the commanded position (TPC) and
the actual position (TFB, TPE, or TANI) as measured by the feedback device.
TSGSET
Transfer Servo Gain Set
Transfers a previously-saved set of servo gain parameters. A gain set is saved with the
SGSET command.
TSTLT
Transfer Servo Settling Time
Transfers the time it took the last move to settle within the target zone (that is, within the
distance zone defined by STRGTD and within the velocity zone defined by STRGTV). The
Target Zone Mode does not need to be enabled to use this command.
Servo Control Techniques
To ensure that you are tuning your servo system properly, you should understand the tuning
techniques described in this section.
The APEX615n employs a PIV&F servo control algorithm. The control techniques available
in this system are as follows:
P ......... Proportional Feedback (controlled with the SGP command)
I .......... Integral Feedback (controlled with the SGI command)
V ......... Velocity Feedback (controlled with the SGV command)
F ......... Velocity and Acceleration Feedforward (controlled by the SGVF and SGAF commands,
respectively)
The following block diagram shows these control techniques in relation to the servo control
algorithm configuration. The table presents a condensed summary of each control’s effect on
the servo system.
Servo
System
APEX615n Servo Control Algorithm
Velocity Feedforward
Current
Output
(SGVF)
Acceleration Feedforward
(SGAF)
Variable Integral Limit
(set with SGILIM)
Integral Feedback
+
(SGI)
+
-
Proportional Feedback
(SGP)
+ +
+
+ -
Dither Control
Frequency (SDTFR)
and Amplitude
(SDTAMP)
(SGV)
APEX615n Installation Guide
Servo
Motor
+10V
-10V
Velocity Feedback
78
Servo
Drive
Digital-to-Analog
Conversion (DAC)
Analog
Control Signal
Position
Feedback
Device
Gain
Proportional (SGP)
Integral (SGI)
Velocity Feedback (SGV)
Velocity Feedforward (SGVF)
Acceleration Feedforward (SGAF)
Stability
Improve
Degrade
Improve
-------------------------
Damping
Improve
Degrade
Improve
-------------------------
Disturbance
Rejection
Improve
Improve
-------------------------------------
Steady
State Error
Improve
Improve
-------------------------------------
Tracking
Error
Improve
Improve
Degrade
Improve
Improve
Proportional Feedback Control (SGP)
Proportional feedback is the most important feedback for stabilizing a servo
system. When the APEX615n uses proportional feedback, the control signal is linearly
proportional to the position error (the difference between the commanded position and the
actual position—see TPER command). The proportional gain is set by the Servo Gain
Proportional (SGP) command. Proportional feedback can be used to make the servo system
more responsive, as well as reduce the steady state position error.
Since the control is proportional to the position error, whenever there is any disturbance
forcing the load away from its commanded position (such as torque ripple or a spring load), the
proportional control can immediately output a signal to move it back toward the commanded
position. This function is called disturbance rejection.
If you tune your system using only the proportional feedback, increasing the proportional
feedback gain (SGP value) too much will cause the system response to be oscillatory,
underdamped, or in some cases unstable.
NOTE
The proportional feedback gain (SGP) should never be set to zero, except when
open-loop operation is desired.
Integral Feedback Control (SGI)
Using integral feedback control, the value of the control signal is integrated at a rate
proportional to the feedback device position error. The rate of integration is set by the Servo
Gain Integral (SGI) command.
The primary function of the integral control is to overcome friction and/or gravity and to reject
disturbances so that steady state position error can be minimized or eliminated. This control
action is important for achieving high system accuracy. However, if you can achieve
acceptable position accuracy by using only the proportional feedback (SGP), then there is no
need to use the integral feedback control.
In the task of reducing position error, the integral gain (SGI) works differently than the
proportional gain (SGP); this is because the magnitude of its control signal is not dependent
on the magnitude of the position error as in the case of proportional feedback. If any position
error persists, then the output of the integral term will ramp up over time until it is high
enough to drive the error back to zero. Therefore, even a very small position error can be
eliminated by the integral feedback control. By the same principle, integral feedback control
can also reduce the tracking error when the system is commanded to cruise at constant
velocity.
Appendix A
79
Controlling Integral
Windup
If integral control (SGI) is used and an appreciable position error has persisted long enough
during the transient period (time taken to reach the setpoint), the control signal generated by
the integral action can end up too high and saturate to the maximum level of the controller’s
analog control signal output. This phenomenon is called integral windup.
After windup occurs, it will take a while before the integrator output returns to a level within
the limit of the controller’s output. Such a delay causes excessive position overshoot and
oscillation. Therefore, the integral windup limit (SGILIM) command is provided for you to
set the absolute limit of the integral and, in essence, turn off the integral action as soon as it
reaches the limit; thus, position overshoot and oscillation can be reduced (see illustration
below). The application of this feature is demonstrated in Step 5 of the Controller Tuning
Procedure below.
Without SGILIM
With SGILIM
Position Overshoot
Position Setpoint
(D Command)
Position
Position
Position Setpoint
(D Command)
Position Error at T1
Time
Internal
Integral
Value
Time
Actual Output
Generated
by the Integral Term
Integral at T1
Max. Analog Output (+10V)
Windup
Duration
(wd)
Max. Analog Output (+10V)
Integral
Windup Limit
(SGILIM)
wd
0V
T1
wd
0V
wd
Min. Analog Output (-10V)
Min. Analog Output (-10V)
Velocity Feedback Control (SGV)
When velocity feedback control is used, the control signal is proportional to the feedback
device’s velocity (rate of change of the actual position). The Servo Gain Velocity (SGV)
command sets the gain, which is in turn multiplied by the feedback device’s velocity to
produce the control signal. Since the velocity feedback acts based upon the feedback device’s
velocity, its control action essentially anticipates the position error and corrects it before it
becomes too large. Such control tends to increase damping and improve the stability of the
system.
A high velocity feedback gain (SGV) can also increase the position tracking error when
traveling at constant velocity. In addition, setting the velocity feedback gain too high tends to
slow down (overdamp) the response to a commanded position change. If a high velocity
feedback gain is needed for adequate damping, you can balance the tracking error by applying
velocity feedforward control (increasing the SGVF value—discussed below).
Since the feedback device’s velocity is derived by differentiating the feedback device’s position
with a finite resolution, the finite word truncation effect and any fluctuation of the feedback
device’s position would be highly magnified in the velocity value, and even more so when
multiplied by a high velocity feedback gain. When the value of the velocity feedback gain has
reached such a limit, the motor will chatter (high-frequency, low-amplitude oscillation) at
steady state.
80
APEX615n Installation Guide
Velocity Feedforward Control (SGVF)
The purpose of velocity feedforward control is to improve tracking performance—that is,
reduce the position error when the system is commanded to move at constant velocity. The
tracking error is mainly attributed to three sources—friction, torque load, and velocity feedback
control (SGV).
Velocity feedforward control is directed by the Servo Gain Velocity Feedforward (SGVF)
setting, which is in turn multiplied by the rate of change (velocity) of the commanded position
to produce the control signal. Consequently, because the control signal is now proportional to
the velocity of the commanded position, the APEX615n essentially anticipates the commanded
position and initiates a control signal ahead of time to more closely follow (track) the
commanded position.
Applications requiring contouring or linear interpolation can benefit from improved tracking
performance; however, if your application only requires short, point-to-point moves, velocity
feedforward control is not necessary.
Because velocity feedforward control is not in the servo feedback loop (see Servo Control
Algorithm drawing above), it does not affect the servo system’s stability. Therefore, there is
no limit on how high the velocity feedforward gain (SGVF) can be set, except when it
saturates the control output (tries to exceed the APEX615n’s analog control signal range of
±10V).
Acceleration Feedforward Control (SGAF)
The purpose of acceleration feedforward control is to improve position tracking performance
when the system is commanded to accelerate or decelerate.
Acceleration feedforward control is directed by the Servo Gain Acceleration Feedforward
(SGAF) setting, which is in turn multiplied by the acceleration of the commanded position to
produce the control signal. Consequently, because the control signal is now proportional to
the acceleration of the commanded position, the APEX615n essentially anticipates the velocity
of the commanded position and initiates a control signal ahead of time to more closely follow
(track) the commanded position.
Same as velocity feedforward control, this control action can improve the performance of linear
interpolation applications. In addition, it also reduces the time required to reach the
commanded velocity. However, if your application only requires short, point-to-point moves,
acceleration feedforward control is not necessary.
Acceleration feedforward control does not affect the servo system’s stability, nor does it have
any effect at constant velocity or at steady state.
Appendix A
81
Controller Tuning Procedure
The Controller Tuning Procedure leads you through the following steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Turn on AC power to the APEX615n.
Setup up for tuning.
Select the 615n's servo Sampling Frequency Ratios (SSFR).
Set the Maximum Position Error (SMPER).
Optimize the Proportional (SGP) and Velocity (SGV) gains.
Use the Integral Feedback Gain (SGI) to reduce steady state error.
Use the Velocity Feedforward Gain (SGVF) to reduce position error at constant velocity.
Use the Acceleration Feedforward Gain (SGAF) to reduce position error during
acceleration and deceleration.
Tuning with Servo Tuner™:
Compumotor also offers Servo Tuner™, a Microsoft Windows™ based program designed to
help you tune your motion control servo system. Refer to the Servo Tuner User Guide for
tuning procedures.
Before you tune the 615n:
If your application requires switching between feedback sources on the same axis, then for
each feedback source on each axis you must select the feedback source with the SFB
command and repeat steps 4-8.
EM ERGENCY SHUT DOWN
If you need to shutdown the APEX615n during the tuning process (for instance, if the system
becomes unstable or experiences a runaway), issue the DRIVEØ command.
Step 1
Turn on AC power to energize the APEX615n.
Step 2
Use a computer (with a terminal emulator) or a dumb terminal to enter the commands noted in
the steps below. To monitor system performance, you may use visual inspection, or use an
analog type position transducer (potentiometer, LVDT, RVDT, etc.) to pick up the load's or
motor's position displacement and monitor the transducer output on a digital storage
oscilloscope.
Step 3
Select the Sampling Frequency Ratio (S S F R ) :
The APEX615n’s control signal is computed by the digital signal processor (DSP). The
velocity of the commanded position, the velocity of the feedback device’s position, and the
integral of the position error are used for various control actions. These measurements are
derived by the DSP from the position values sampled periodically at a fixed rate; this sampling
rate is called the servo sampling frequency (samples/second).
NOTE
The SSFR setting affects the dither frequency ratio (SDTFR setting). Refer to the SSFR and
SDTFR command descriptions in the 6000 Series Software Reference for details.
82
APEX615n Installation Guide
Higher sampling frequencies improve the accuracy of the derived velocity and integral values.
A higher sampling frequency can also improve the tracking of a rapidly changing or oscillating
position. Therefore, the servo sampling frequency is a key parameter that influences the servo
system’s stability and closed loop bandwidth.
In addition to computing the APEX615n’s control signal, the DSP also computes the
commanded position trajectory. When the servo sampling frequency is increased, the motion
trajectory update rate has to be decreased, and vice versa. The ratio between the servo sampling
frequency and the trajectory update rate, called the sampling frequency ratio, depends on the
requirements of your application and/or the dynamic characteristics of the system. The Servo
Sampling Frequency Ratio (SSFR) command offers four selectable ratio settings. These four
ratios and the actual sampling frequencies and sampling periods (reciprocal of sampling
frequency) are shown below.
SSFR
Command
Setting
SSFR1
SSFR2
SSFR4
SSFR8
Servo Sampling Update
Frequency
Period
(samples/sec.)
(µsec)
3030
330
5405
185
6250
160
6667
150
Motion Trajectory Update
Frequency
Period
(samples/sec.)
(µsec)
3030
330
2703
370
1563
640
833
1200
System Update
Frequency
Period
(samples/sec.)
(µsec)
757
1320
675
1480
520
1920
417
2400
The general rule for determining the proper SSFR value is to first select the slowest servo
sampling frequency that is able to give a satisfactory response. This can be done by
experiment or based on the closed-loop bandwidth requirement for your application. (Keep in
mind that increasing the SSFR value allows for higher bandwidths, but produces a rougher
motion profile; conversely, decreasing the SSFR value provides a smoother profile, but makes
the servo system less stable and slower to respond.)
As an example, if your application requires a closed-loop bandwidth of 350 Hz, you can use
the following guideline to determine the minimum servo sampling frequency: set the servo
sampling frequency at least 8 times higher than the bandwidth frequency. The required
minimum servo sampling frequency would be 2800 Hz.
The table below provides guidelines for various application requirements.
Application Requirement
XY Linear Interpolation
Fast point-to-point motion
Regulation (speed, torque, etc.)
High natural frequency system
SSFR1
SSFR2
4
4
SSFR4
SSFR8
4
4
4
4
4
Setting the Sampling Frequency Ratio
Select a sampling ratio (with the SSFR command) appropriate to your system now, before
you proceed to tune each gain.
If you change the sampling frequency ratios (SSFR) after the tuning is complete and the new
servo sampling frequency is lower than the previous one, the response may change (if your
system bandwidth is quite high) and you may have to re-tune the system.
Appendix A
83
Step 4
Set the Maximum Position Error (SMPER ):
The SMPER command allows you to set the maximum position error allowed before an error
condition occurs. The position error, monitored once per system update period, is the
difference between the commanded position and the actual position as read by the feedback
device selected with the last SFB command. Larger values allow greater oscillations/motion
when unstable; therefore, smaller SMPER values are safer.
When the position error exceeds the value entered by the SMPER command, an error condition
is latched (see TAS or AS bit #23) and the 6000 controller issues a shutdown to the faulted
axis and sets its analog output command to zero volts. To enable the system again, the
appropriate DRIVE1 command must be issued, which also sets the commanded position equal
to the actual feedback device position (incremental devices will be zeroed).
If the SMPER value is set to zero, the position error condition is not monitored, allowing the
position error to accumulate without causing a fault.
Step 5
Optimize the Proportional ( S G P ) and Velocity (S G V ) gains (see illustration
for tuning process ):
a.
Enter the following commands to create a step input profile (use a comma in the first
data field when tuning axis 2—e.g., D,1ØØ):
C o m m a nd
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
☞
Refer to the Tuning
Scenario section
later in this chapter
for a case example.
h.
> A999
Set acceleration to 999 units/sec2
> AD999
Set deceleration to 999 units/sec2
> V3Ø
Set velocity to 30 units/sec
> D1ØØ
Set distance to 100 units
Start with an SGP command value of 0.5 (SGPØ.5 or SGP,Ø.5).
Enter the GO1 or GO,1 command depending on which axis is being tuned at the time.
Observe the plot of the commanded position versus the actual position on the
oscilloscope. If the response is already very oscillatory, lower the gain (SGP); if it is
sluggish (overdamped), increase the SGP gain.
Repeat Steps 4.c. and 4.d. until the response is slightly under-damped.
Start with an SGV command value of 0.1 (SGVØ.1 or SGV,Ø.1).
As you did in Step 4.c., enter GO1 or GO,1.
Observe the plot on the oscilloscope. If the response is sluggish (overdamped), reduce
the SGV gain. Repeat Steps 4.f. and 4.g. until the response is slightly under-damped.
The flow diagram below shows you how to get the values of the proportional and
velocity feedback gains for the fastest, well-damped response in a step-by-step fashion.
The tuning principle here is based on these four characteristics:
•
•
•
•
84
D e s c r ipt io n
APEX615n Installation Guide
Increasing the proportional gain (SGP) can speed up the response time and increase
the damping.
Increasing the velocity feedback gain (SGV) can increase the damping more so than
the proportional gain can, but also may slow down the response time.
When the SGP gain is too high, it can cause instability.
When the SGV gain is too high, it can cause the motor (or valve, hydraulic
cylinder, etc.) to chatter.
START
Increase SGP
UNTIL
OR
OR
Decrease SGV
UNTIL
Increase SGV
UNTIL
OR
Decrease SGV
UNTIL
OR
STOP
Decrease SGP
UNTIL
OR
Increase SGV
UNTIL
OR
Decrease SGV
UNTIL
Appendix A
85
Step 6
☞
Use the Integral Feedback Gain (SGI) to reduce steady state error:
a.
Determine the steady state position error (the difference between the commanded
position and the actual position). You can determine this error value by the TPER
command when the load is not moving.
Steady state position error is
described earlier in the
Performance Measurements
section.
NOTE
If the steady state position error is zero or so small that it is acceptable for your
application, you do not need to use the integral gain. For hydraulic
applications, it is usually best to use a small SGI value, or use SGIØ while moving and
use SGIn when stopped. The use of the Target Zone Settling Mode (STRGTE) is
recommended.
b. If you have to enter the integral feedback gain to reduce the steady error, start out with
a small value (e.g., SGIØ.1). After the gain is entered, observe two things from the
response:
• Whether or not the magnitude of steady state error reduces
• Whether or not the steady state error reduces to zero at a faster rate
c. Keep increasing the gain to further improve these two measurements until the
overshoot starts to increase and the response becomes oscillatory.
d. There are three things you can do at this point (If these three things do not work, that
means the integral gain is too high and you have to lower it.):
1st Lower the integral gain (SGI) value to reduce the overshoot.
☞
2nd
Check whether the 615n's analog output saturates the ±10V limit; you can do this by
observing the signal from a digital oscilloscope. If it saturates, then lower the integral
output limit by using the SGILIM command. This should help reduce the overshoot and
shorten the settling time. Sometimes, even if the analog output is not saturated, you can
still reduce the overshoot by lowering SGILIM to a value less than the maximum output
value. However, lowering it too much can impair the effectiveness of the integral
feedback.
3rd
You can still increase the velocity feedback gain (SGV value) further, provided that it is
not already at the highest possible setting (causing the motor or valve to chatter).
If you are using current control,
convert the offset from
milliamps to volts and enter the
result in the SGILIM
command.
Step 7
Use the Velocity Feedforward Gain (SGVF) to reduce position error at
constant speed:
a.
Execute a continuous (MC1 command) move, setting the acceleration, deceleration and
velocity values appropriate to your application. Set the SGVF value to be the product
of SGP ∗ SGV (if SGV = zero, set SGVF equal to SGP).
b. Check the position error at constant velocity by issuing the TPER command.
c. Increase SGVF to reduce the position error (repeat steps a and b as necessary).
Step 8
Use the Acceleration Feedforward Gain (SGAF) to reduce position error
during acceleration:
a.
Execute a continuous (MC1 command) move, setting the acceleration, deceleration and
velocity values appropriate to your application. Set SGAF to 0.01 (SGAFØ.Ø1).
b. Check the position error during acceleration by issuing the TPER command.
c. Increase SGAF to reduce the position error (repeat steps a and b as necessary).
86
APEX615n Installation Guide
Tuning Scenario
This example shows how to obtain the highest possible proportional feedback (SGP) and
velocity feedback (SGV) gains experimentally by using the flow diagram illustrated earlier in
Step 5 of the Tuning Procedure.
NOTE
The steps shown below (steps 1 - 11) represent the major steps of the process; the actual
progression between these steps usually requires several iterations.
The motion command used for this example is a step command with a step size of 100. The
plots shown are as they appear in Motion Architect’s Controller Tuner Module (X axis = time,
Y axis = position).
Step 1
For a starting trial, we set the proportional
feedback gain (SGP) to 2. As you can see
by the plot, the response is slow.
In the next step, we should increase SGP
until the response is slightly underdamped.
Commanded Position
SGP = 2
Actual Position
Step 2
With SGP equal to 15, the response becomes
slightly underdamped (see plot).
Therefore, we should introduce the velocity
feedback gain (SGV) to damp out the
oscillation.
SGP = 15
Step 3
Step 4
With SGV equal to 2, the response turns out
fairly well damped (see plot).
At this point, the SGP should be raised again
until oscillation or excessive overshoot
appears.
As we iteratively increase SGP to 105,
overshoot and chattering becomes significant
(see plot). This means either the SGV gain
is too low and/or the SGP is too high.
Next, we should try raising the SGV gain to
see if it could damp out the overshoot and
chattering.
SGP = 15
SGV = 2
SGP = 105
SGV = 2
Appendix A
87
Step 5
Step 6
After the SGV gain is raised to 2.6, the
overshoot was reduced but chattering is still
quite pronounced. This means either one or
both of the gains is too high.
The next step should be to lower the SGV
gain first.
SGP = 105
SGV = 2.6
Lowering the SGV gain to 2.3 does not help
reduce the chattering by much.
Therefore, we should lower the SGP gain
until chattering stops.
SGP = 105
SGV = 2.3
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Chattering stops after reducing the SGP gain
to 85. However, the overshoot is still a
little too high.
The next step should be to try raising the
SGV to damp out the overshoot.
After raising the SGV gain to 2.4, overshoot
is reduced a little, but chattering reappears.
This means the gains are still too high.
Next, we should lower the SGV gain until
chattering stops.
SGP = 85
SGV = 2.3
SGP = 85
SGV = 2.4
After lowering the SGV gain to 2.2 (even
less than in Step 7—2.3), chattering stops.
Next we should lower the SGP gain.
SGP = 85
SGV = 2.2
Step 10
88
Overshoot is reduced very little after
lowering the SGP gain to 70. (The SGV
gain might have been lowered too much in
Step 9.)
Next, we should try raising the SGV gain
again until the overshoot is gone.
APEX615n Installation Guide
SGP = 70
SGV = 2.2
Step 11
When we raised the SGV gain to 2.52, the
step response became fast and very stable.
SGP = 70
SGV = 2.52
Commanded
Move is actually
Completed
Actual
Time
When the Target Zone Mode
is not enabled, the move is
considered to be complete
and subsequent moves can
be executed at this point in
time.
Velocity
Under default operation (Target Zone Mode not
enabled), the APEX615n’s move completion
criteria is simply derived from the move
trajectory. The APEX615n considers the
current preset move to be complete when the
commanded trajectory has reached the desired
target position; after that, subsequent
commands/moves can be executed for that same
axis. Consequently, the next move or external
operation can begin before the actual position
has settled to the commanded position (see
diagram).
Position
Target Zone (Move Completion Criteria)
Actual
Commanded
Time
Target Zone Mode
To prevent premature command execution before the actual position settles into the
commanded position, use the Target Zone Mode. In this mode, enabled with the STRGTE
command, the move cannot be considered complete until the actual position and actual
velocity are within the target zone (that is, within the distance zone defined by STRGTD and
less than or equal to the velocity defined by STRGTV). If the load does not settle into the
target zone before the timeout period set with the STRGTT command, the APEX615n detects a
timeout error (see illustration below).
Refer to the Error
Handling section in
the 6000 Series
Software Reference
for error program
examples
If the timeout error occurs, you can prevent subsequent command/move execution only if you
enable the ERROR command to continually check for this error condition, and when it occurs
to branch to a programmed response you can define in the ERRORP program.
As an example, setting the distance zone to ±5 steps (STRGTD5), the velocity zone to ≤0.5
rps (STRGTVØ.5), and the timeout period to 1/2 second (STRGTT5ØØ), a move with a
distance of 8,000 steps (D8ØØØ) must end up between position 7,995 and 8,005 and settle
down to ≤0.5 rps within 500 ms (1/2 second) after the commanded profile is complete.
Appendix A
89
Damping is critical
To ensure that a move settles within the distance zone, it must be damped to the point that it
will not move out of the zone in an oscillatory manner. This helps ensure the actual velocity
falls within the target velocity zone set with the STRGTV command (see illustration below).
Failed Move Completion
Successful Move Completion
STRGTD
STRGTD
(Distance Zone)
(Distance Zone)
Position
Commanded
Position
Commanded
Move
Completed
Move
Completed
Actual
Actual
Time
Velocity
STRGTT
STRGTV
(Timeout Period)
Timeout Occurs,
Error Bit Set
Commanded
Velocity
Actual
Time
Commanded
Actual
STRGTT
(Timeout Period)
STRGTV
(Velocity Zone)
(Velocity Zone)
Time
TSTLT
(Actual Settling Time)
Checking the Actual Using the TSTLT command, you can display the actual time it took the last move to settle
Settling Time
into the target zone (that is, within the distance zone defined by STRGTD and less than or
equal to the velocity defined by STRGTV). The reported value represents milliseconds. This
command is usable whether or not the Target Zone Settling Mode is enabled
with the STRGTE command.
90
APEX615n Installation Guide
Time
Appendix B
Reducing Electrical Noise
Noise-related difficulties can range in severity from minor positioning errors to damaged
equipment from runaway loads crashing blindly through limit switches. In microprocessorcontrolled equipment such as the APEX615n, the processor constantly retrieves instructions
from memory in a controlled sequence. If an electrical disturbance occurs, it may cause the
processor to misinterpret an instruction or access the wrong data. This can be catastrophic to
the program and force you to reset the processor.
Sources of Noise
Being invisible, electrical noise can be very mysterious, but it invariably comes from the
following sources:
• Power line noise
• Externally conducted noise
• Transmitted noise
• Ground loops
The following electrical devices are notorious for generating unwanted electrical noise
conditions:
•
•
•
•
Coil-driven devices: conducted and power line noise
SCR-fired heaters: transmitted and power line noise
Valves, motors & motor drives: transmitted and power line noise
Welders (electric): transmitted and power line noise
Power Line Noise
Power line noise is usually easy to resolve due to the wide availability of line filtering
equipment for the industry. Only the most severe situations call for an isolation transformer.
Line filtering equipment is required when other devices connected to the local power line are
switching large amounts of current, especially if the switching occurs at a high frequency.
Any device having coils is likely to disrupt the power line when it is switched off. Surge
suppressers, such as metal oxide varistors (MOVs) are capable of limiting this type of
electrical noise. A series resistor/capacitor (RC) network across the coil is also effective
(resistance: 500 to 1,000 Ω; capacitance: 0.1 to 0.2 µF). Coil-driven devices (inductive
loads) include relays, solenoids, contactors, clutches, brakes, and motor starters.
Typical RC Network
AC or DC
R
C
MOV
Inductive
Load
AC or DC
Internal Switching Noise
This noise directly relates to the high dv/dt from the internal switching of the IGBT power
block of the APEX615n's drive. This high dv/dt creates a large earth ground di/dt through the
motor case. This may cause the ground to jump if a solid earth connection is not present.
Depending on how the drive and other equipment are connected to the earth ground, users may
experience voltage spikes on I/O lines. Systems involving data acquisition from low level
analog and digital signals are most vulnerable.
The best method to limit the dv/dt is to add a filter between the drive output and the motor.
This reduces the dv/dt and decreases the di/dt a great deal. These filters have been installed by
Compumotor in several applications with good results. Another method that can be used to
reduce noise is to install AC line input filters. Compumotor has found from our own testing
that properly installed AC line filters, on the drive as well as the controller, reduce noise on
both analog and digital inputs and outputs.
Compumotor has located a series of suitable AC line filters and motor output filters that can
be purchased for use in applications as needed. These filters are manufactured by the
SCHAFFNER Co. and may be purchased by contacting the manufacturer or the stocking
distributor listed at the end of this appendix. The suitable motor output filters are listed
below. The suggested AC line filters are listed in the "Filtering the AC mains supply"
section of Appendix E of this document.
Manufacturer
Part Number
APEX6151
Schaffner Co.
FN 510-8/29
APEX6152
Schaffner Co.
FN 510-8/29
APEX6154
Schaffner Co.
FN 510-16/29
Externally Conducted Noise
Externally-conducted noise is similar to power line noise, but the disturbances are created on
signal and ground wires that are connected to the APEX615n. This kind of noise can get into
logic circuit ground or into the processor power supply and scramble the program. The
problem here is that control equipment often shares a common DC ground wire that may be
connected to several devices, such as a DC power supply, programmable controller, remote
switches, etc. When a noisy device such as a relay or solenoid is attached to the DC ground, it
may cause disturbances within the APEX615n.
To solve a noise problem caused by DC mechanical relays and solenoids, you can connect a
diode backwards across the coil to clamp the induced voltage kick that the coil will produce.
The diode should be rated at 4 times the coil voltage and 10 times the coil current. Using
solid state relays is another way to eliminate this problem.
Diode
DC
92
APEX615n Installation Guide
Multiple devices on the same circuit should be grounded together at a single point.
Furthermore, power supplies and programmable controllers often have DC common tied to
Earth (AC power ground). As a rule, it is preferable to have the APEX615n Iso GND floating
with respect to Earth. This prevents noisy equipment that is grounded to Earth from sending
noise into the APEX615n. When floating the signal ground is not possible, you should make
the Earth ground connection at only one point.
In many cases, optical isolation may be required to completely eliminate electrical contact
between the APEX615n and a noisy environment. Solid state relays provide this type of
isolation.
Transmitted Noise
Transmitted noise is picked up by external connections to the APEX615n, and in severe cases
can attack the APEX615n when there are no external connections. The APEX615n’s sheet
metal enclosure will typically shield the electronics from this, but openings in the enclosure
for connections and front panel controls may leak.
When high current contacts open, they draw an arc, producing a burst of broad spectrum radio
frequency noise that can be picked up on a limit switch or other wiring. High-current and
high-voltage wires have an electrical field around them and may induce noise on signal wiring,
especially when they are tied in the same wiring bundle or conduit.
When this kind of problem occurs, you should consider shielding signal cables or isolating the
signals. A proper shield surrounds the signal wires to intercept electrical fields, but this shield
must be tied to Earth to drain the induced voltages. At the very least, wires should be run in
twisted pairs to limit straight line antenna effects.
Installing the APEX615n in a NEMA enclosure ensures protection from this kind of noise,
unless noise-producing equipment is also mounted inside the enclosure. Connections external
to the enclosure must be shielded.
Even the worst noise problems in environments near 600 amp welders and 25kW transmitters
have been solved using enclosures, conduit, optical isolation, and single-point ground
techniques.
Ground Loops
Ground Loops are the most mysterious noise problems. They seem to occur most often in
systems where a control computer is using RS-232C communication. Symptoms like garbled
transmissions and intermittent operation are typical.
The problem occurs in systems where multiple Earth ground connections exist, particularly
when these connections are far apart.
Ground Loops—
Noise Scenario
Suppose an APEX615n is controlling a motor, and the limit switches use an external power
supply. The APEX615n is controlled by a computer in another room. If the power supply
Common is connected to Earth, the potential exists for ground loop problems. This is
because most computers have their RS-232C signal common tied to Earth. The loop starts at
the APEX615n system limit switch ground, goes to Earth through the drive, and on to Earth
at the computer. From there, the loop returns to the APEX615n system through RS-232C
signal ground. If a voltage potential exists between drive Earth and remote computer Earth,
ground current will flow through the RS-232C ground, creating unpredictable results.
The way to test for and ultimately eliminate a ground loop is to lift or cheat Earth ground
connections in the system until the symptoms disappear.
Appendix B
93
Defeating Noise
The best time to handle electrical noise problems is before they occur. When a motion system
is in the design process, the designer should consider the following set of guidelines for
system wiring (in order of importance):
1. Put surge suppression components on all electrical coils: Resistor/capacitor filters,
MOVs, Zener and clamping diodes.
2. Shield all remote connections, use twisted pairs. Shields should be tied to Earth at one
end.
3. Put all microelectronic components in an enclosure. Keep noisy devices outside. Watch
internal temperature.
4. Ground signal common wiring at one point. Float this ground from Earth if possible.
5. Tie all mechanical grounds to Earth at one point. Run chassis and motor grounds to
the frame, and the frame to Earth.
6. Isolate remote signals. Solid state relays or opto isolators are recommended.
7. Filter the power line. Use common RF filters, and use an isolation transformer for
worst case.
8. Filter the lines between the drive output and the motor.
A noise problem must be identified before it can be solved. The obvious way to approach a
problem situation is to eliminate potential noise sources until the symptoms disappear, as in
the case of ground loops. When this is not practical, use the above guidelines to shotgun the
installation.
References
Information about the equipment referred to may be obtained by calling the numbers listed
below.
•
•
•
•
•
Corcom line filters, (214) 386-5515
Opto-22 optically isolated relays, (408) 496-6611
Crydom optically isolated relays, (415) 463-2250
Potter Brumfield optically isolated relays, (812) 386-1000
Teal power line isolation filters, (800) 888-8325
SCHAFFNER EMC, Inc.
12 Hughes St.
Suite D-106
Irvine, CA 91718-1901
SCHAFFNER EMC, Inc.
9B Fadem Road
Springfield, NJ 07081
Phone:
Fax:
Phone: 201-379-7778
Fax:
201-379-1151
714-457-9400
714-457-9510
Kam Electronics (Stocking Distributor)
400 Boren Ave. North
Seattle, WA 98109
Phone:
Fax:
94
APEX615n Installation Guide
206-382-1300
206-382-0186
Appendix C
Motor Specifications
Motor Specifications
Speed/torque curves, motor specifications, and dimensions are shown on the following pages.
Motor Brakes
Motor brakes are mounted directly behind the motor and are pre-assembled at the factory.
When ordering the brake option, specify the motor type.
Brake Characteristics
Supply voltage
Supply current
Static braking torque
APEX604
24
0.57
326 (2.3)
APEX605/606/610
24
0.57
850 (6.0)
APEX620/630/635
24
0.93
1130 (8.0)
APEX640
24
1.27
6800 (48)
Units
VDC
A
oz-in
(Nm)
APEX6xx Motor Brake Characteristics
Motor Data
The data sheets show motor characteristics. Torque specifications are with rated and peak
current for the motor. Rated and peak current for the drive may be lower—thus, torque may be
lower. Consult the data sheets for motor capabilities. Consult the speed/torque curves for
APEX615n system capabilities.
Positional Repeatability
Repeatability: ±0.088 degrees, unloaded
Positional Accuracy
Resolver Accuracy:
±10 arc minutes
Resolver-to-Digital Converter Accuracy:
±10 arc minutes
Resolver-to-Digital Converter Resolution:
4096 counts/rev
Selecting Controller/Drive/Motor Combinations
We recommend selecting motors for use with the APEX615n Controller/Drives as follows:
APEX6151:
APEX6152:
APEX6154:
SM-231A, SM232A, SM-232B, APEX602, APEX603
APEX604, APEX605, APEX606
APEX610, APEX620, APEX630, APEX635, APEX640
Speed/Torque Curves
The following speed/torque curves represent the available shaft torque at different operating
speeds, under the following conditions. Actual motor torque may vary ±10% due to motor
manufacturing variances.
SM Motors:
Apex Motors:
25°C (77°F) ambient temperature
Nominal torque constant Kt
Motor mounted to heatsink:
10" x 10" x0.25" aluminum
40°C (104°F) ambient temperature
Nominal torque constant Kt
Motor mounted to aluminum heatsink:
8" x 12" x0.25" for APEX602 - APEX630
11.5" x 12" x0.75" for APEX635, APEX640
Actual motor torque may vary ±10% due to motor manufacturing variances.
Continuous Duty means steady state operation for drive ambient temperatures of 0°C to
50°C. Intermittent Duty means operation for shorter periods of time.
240VAC SINGLE PHASE OPERATION: You must limit single phase operations to
current levels that do not blow the AC input fuse. Dotted lines on the speed torque curves
show maximum single phase current (8A rms for APEX604, 605, 606 motors; 20A rms for
APEX610, 620, 630, 635, 640 motors). If you use single phase power, you must operate
your motor in the region below the dotted line.
CAUTION
SM Series Servo Motors are optimized for operation with APEX615n controller/drives at
120VAC. Do not power the controller drive with 240VAC if you use an SM Motor.
Torque
oz-in
(N-m)
350
(2.47)
SM-231A at 120VAC
250
(1.77)
150
(1.05)
50
(0.35)
0
0
4000
(67)
Speed
SM-232A at 120VAC
500
(3.53)
Torque
Torque
oz-in
(N-m)
700
(4.94)
2000
(33)
300
(2.12)
100
(0.71)
0
8000 RPM
(133) (rps)
6000
(100)
oz-in
(N-m)
500
(3.53)
400
(2.82)
SM-233B at 120VAC
300
(2.12)
200
(1.41)
100
(0.71)
0
0
1000
(17)
oz-in
(N-m)
2000
(33)
3000
(50)
Speed
4000
(67)
5000
(83)
6000 RPM
(100) (rps)
0
APEX602-MO at 240VAC
1000
(17)
oz-in
(N-m)
1,600
(26.4)
(single phase)
2000
(33)
3000
4000
(50)
(67)
Speed
5000
(83)
6000
(100)
7000 RPM
(117) (rps)
APEX603-MO at 240VAC
(single phase)
700
(4.9)
1,200
(19.8)
Torque
Torque
500
(3.5)
800
(13.2)
300
(2.1)
400
(6.6)
100
(0.7)
0
0
1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 RPM
(17) (33) (50) (67) (83) (100) (117) (133) (rps)
Speed
Speed/Torque Curves
96
APEX615n Installation Guide
0
0
1000
(17)
2000
(33)
Speed
3000
(50)
4000 RPM
(67) (rps)
oz-in (N-m)
APEX604-MO at 240VAC
APEX605-MO at 240VAC
1200 (8.4)
oz-in (N-m)
800 (5.6)
900 (6.3)
Intermittent Duty
Intermittent Duty
Torque
Torque
600 (4.2)
400 (2.8)
300 (2.1)
2
Sin 40VAC
gle
Pha *
se
Continuous Duty
200 (1.4)
600 (4.2)
Continuous Duty
0
0
2000
(33)
4000
(67)
6000
(100)
0
8000 RPM
(133) (rps)
0
1200
(20)
2400
(40)
Speed
oz-in (N-m)
24
Sing 0VAC*
le P
hase
3600
(60)
4800
(80)
6000
(100)
7200 RPM
(120) (rps)
Speed
oz-in (N-m)
APEX606-MO at 240VAC
2400 (16)
2000 (14)
1800 (12)
1500 (10.6)
APEX610-MO at 240VAC
1200
(8)
600
(4)
Intermittent Duty
1000 (7.0)
2
Sin 40VAC
gle
Pha**
se
Continuous Duty
500 (3.5)
Continuous Duty
0
Torque
Torque
Intermittent Duty
0
1000
(17)
24
Sing 0VAC*
le Ph
ase
2000
(33)
3000
(50)
0
4000 RPM
(67) (rps)
0
2000
(33)
4000
(67)
Speed
oz-in (N-m)
APEX620-MO at 240VAC
4000 (28)
5600 (39)
3000 (21)
4200 (29)
2000 (14)
(7)
0
1000
(17)
2000
(33)
3000
(50)
2800 (19)
1400
24
Sing 0VAC**
le P
hase
Continuous Duty
0
APEX630-MO at 240VAC
Intermittent Duty
Intermittent Duty
1000
2
Sin 40V
gle AC
Ph **
as
e
(9)
Continuous Duty
0
4000 RPM
(67) (rps)
0
600
(10)
Speed
oz-in (N-m)
8000 RPM
(133) (rps)
Speed
Torque
Torque
oz-in (N-m)
6000
(100)
1200
(20)
1800
(30)
2400
(40)
3000
(50)
3600 RPM
(60) (rps)
Speed
APEX635-MO at 240VAC
APEX640-MO at 240VAC
oz-in (N-m)
5600 (39)
8000 (56)
Intermittent Duty
Intermittent Duty
6000 (42)
2800 (19)
1400
Torque
Torque
4200 (29)
(9)
Continuous Duty
0
24
Sing 0VAC**
le Ph
ase
4000 (28)
2
Sin 40V
gle AC
Ph **
as
e
2000 (14)
Continuous Duty
0
600
(10)
1200
(20)
1800
(30)
2400
(40)
Speed
3000
(50)
3600 RPM
(60) (rps)
0
0
*240VAC single phase, 8A rms line current
**240VAC single phase, 20A rms line current
Speed/Torque Curves
400
(7)
800
(13)
1200
(20)
1600
(27)
2000 RPM
(33) (rps)
Speed
(at nominal value for torque constant)
Appendix C
97
SM Motor Specifications
Parameter
Stall Torque Continuous 1
Symbol
T cs
Units
lb.in.
oz. in.
Nm
amperes - rms
rpm
rps
lb.in.
oz. in.
Nm
amperes
lb.in.
oz. in.
Nm
watts
hp
volts/radian/sec
volts/KRPM
oz. in./ amp rms
Nm/amp rms
ohms
millihenries
°C/watt
oz.in./÷watt
Nm/÷watt
oz. in./Krpm
Nm/Krpm
Stall Current Continuous 1
Rated Speed
Ics
wr
Peak Torque 1, 6
T pk
Peak Current, rms 1
Torque @ Rated Speed1
Ipk
Tc
Rated Power -- Output Shaft 1
Po
Voltage Constant 3,4,
Voltage Constant 3,4,
Torque Constant 3,4, 7
Kb
Ke
Kt
Resistance 1,3
Inductance 5
Thermal Resistance 1
Motor Constant
R
L
Rth
Km
Viscous Damping
B
Torque - Static Friction
Tf
oz. in.
Nm
Thermal Time Constant
Electrical Time Constant
Mechanical Time Constant
Rotor Inertia
tth
te
tm
J
Weight
#
minutes
milliseconds
milliseconds
lb.in.sec2
kgm2∗1E-6
pounds
kg
Winding Class
1
SM231AR
3.5
56
0.40
2.0
7500
125
17.5
280
1.98
10
2.8
46
0.32
250
0.34
0.161
16.86
27.82
0.20
5.22
1.64
2.23
9.58
0.07
1.24
8.76 x 10-3
1.2
8.47 x 10-3
30
0.31
13.7
0.00048
54.23
2.6
1.18
H
@ 25°C ambient w/ 10x10x0.25 inch mounting plate, 150°∞C winding temperature
For 40°C ambient operation, reduce values by 12%.
3
± 10%, line-to-line
4
peak value
5
± 30%, line-to-line, inductance bridge measurement method @ 1kHz
6
Peak current for 1 sec with initial winding temperature of 60°C or less.
7
Effective torque constant when applied with a sinusoidal amplifier.
All specifications are subject to engineering change
APEX and SM Resolver Specifications
Parameter
Input voltage @ 7000 Hz
Input current, max.
Input power, nominal
Impedance ZSO (@90∞)
Impedance ZRO
Impedance ZRS
Transformation ratio
Output voltage
D.C. rotor resistance
D.C. stator resistance
Sensitivity
Max. Error from EZ
Phase shift, open circuit
Null voltage (total)
Impedance ZSS
Inertia
98
APEX615n Installation Guide
Value
4.25 volts
55 ma
0.12 watts
58 +j145 ohms
53 +j72 ohms
42 +j55 ohms
0.470 ±5%
2.0 ±5% volts
23 ±10% ohms
19 ±10% ohms
35 mV/Degree
±10 minutes
5∞ leading ±3”
20 mV rms
50 +j128 ohms
included in motor specification
SM232AR
6.7
107
0.76
2.0
4250
71
33.4
535
3.78
10
6.0
96
0.68
302
0.40
0.310
32.45
53.54
0.38
7.5
2.9
1.58
15.99
0.11
2.07
14.76 x 10-3
2.0
14.10 x 10-3
35
0.39
8.6
0.00084
94.91
3.5
1.59
H
SM233BR
10.2
163
1.15
3.9
6000
100
50.9
815
5.76
19.5
9.0
145
1.02
643
0.86
0.242
25.33
41.76
0.29
2.58
1.06
1.26
21.25
0.15
2.86
20.20 x 10-3
2.25
15.90 x 10-3
40
0.41
7.0
0.00119
134.50
4.4
2.00
H
Value
Units
Tolerance
52.6 (0.37)
oz-in/A rms (Nm/A rms)
± 10%
22.5
V rms/Krpm
± 10%
5.3
milliseconds
nominal
1.40
milliseconds
nominal
11.0
minutes
nominal
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
236 (1.67)
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
223 (1.57)
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
202 (1.43)
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
630 (4.45)
max.
oz-in (Nm)
7.68 (0.05)
max. [3]
percent
5
7500 (125)
rpm (rps)
reference
7500 (125)
rpm (rps)
reference
250
Hz
max.
4.2
A rms
max. [1]
12.6
A rms
nominal
240
V rms
reference
250
V rms
maximum
1.12 (1.5)
kWatts (hp)
min. [1]
14.4
mH
± 30%
2.72
ohms
± 10 % [1]
96500
rads/sec2
Theoretical
2.52 (46.1)
oz-in2 (kgm2 ∗ 1E-6)
nominal
0.384 (0.0027)
oz-in/krpm (Nm/krpm)
nominal
7.0 (3.17)
lbs. (kg)
max.
170°C (338°F) [4] °C (°F)
max.
145°C (293°F)
°C (°F)
reference
H
—
reference
170°C (338°F)
°C (°F)
± 5° C
135°C (275°F)
°C (°F)
± 10° C
1750
VAC
min.
0.000898
µF
max.
65 [8]
rated
standard
12E-6 (68E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
7.0E-6 (40E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
35
RC-#30
—
reference
36
NdFeB
—
—
37
81 (360)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
65 (289)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
56 (249)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
51 (227)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
48 (213)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
38
N
ISO 2373
Standard
39
1/Class 3
ABEC/AFBMA
reference
40
SRI #2
Manufacturer
reference
41
3 (0.21)
psi (kg/cm2)
max.
42
3 phase wye connected 2(P/2)
43
A-C-B (viewed from front face plate)
44
Industrial Drives B-104-B
45
Single-Speed; Rotor-Excited; ± 10 arc min.;
Resolution is 4096 counts/rev post-quadrature
46
Resolver Manufacturer/Model #
Fasco # 21-BRCX-335-J39
47
Standard Resolver Cable Part Number
71-011777-xx
48
Standard Motor Cable Part Number
71-011774-xx
49
Options:
Brake—24VDC (0.57A)—326 oz-in (2.3 Nm) Holding Torque
(requires resolver
IP67 Classification
No Keyway
cable 71-014082-xx)
Incremental Encoder
Shaft Modifications
Tachometer
IP65 Shaft Seal
[1] 25°C (77°F) Ambient
[5] Rotor steel is rated as fatigue proof
[2] 40°C (104°F) Ambient
[6] Loads centered 1 inch from mounting flange
[3] Measured at 60 rpm (1 rps) in Velocity Mode
[7] Loads may be radial and axial such that the sum of the
[4] Rated for 20,000 Hours or 40,000 Hours
radial and two times the axial does not exceed this figure.
@ 155° C (311°F)
[8] Motor shaft is IP30 rated.
APEX602 Motor Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Motor Size:
Constant (s):
APEX602
Torque
Voltage (Sinusoidal)
Electrical Time
Mechanical Time
Thermal
Torque (s):
Continuous, Stall
(NOTE: Values are with Continuous, Stall
rated and peak current, Continuous, Rated
lines 15 & 16 below.
Peak, Max w/o Saturation
Drive current, and thus Static Friction
torque, may be lower.) Ripple (of Rated Torque)
Speed:
Rated
Maximum
Frequency
Rated
Current:
Rated
Peak
Voltage:
Rated
Max
Output Power
Rated
Inductance
Terminal (line-line)
D.C. Resistance
Terminal (line-line)
Acceleration at Rated Torque
Rotor Inertia
Damping
Weight
Winding Temperature
Winding Temperature Rise (Above Ambient) [1]
Insulation Class
Thermostat TRIP Temperature
Thermostat RESET Temperature
Dielectric Strength, (Winding-to-Frame)
Winding Capacitance-to-Frame
IP Classification
Shaft:
Radial-Play
At End
At Faceplate
Material [5]
Magnet Type
Loading [6]
1000 rpm (17 rps)
2000 rpm (33 rps)
3000 rpm (50 rps)
4000 rpm (67 rps)
5000 rpm (83 rps)
Motor Vibration
Bearing Class, Internal/External
Bearing Grease
Shaft Seal Pressure
Basic Motor Design
Stator Phase Sequence
Vendor/Supplier
Resolver Type/Accuracy
Appendix C
99
Value
Units
Tolerance
114.6 (0.81)
oz-in/A rms (Nm/A rms)
± 10%
49.0
V rms/Krpm
± 10%
9.7
milliseconds
nominal
----milliseconds
nominal
18
minutes
nominal
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
367 (2.59)
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
346 (2.44)
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
356 (2.51)
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
1046 (7.38)
max.
oz-in (Nm)
12.0 (0.08)
max. [3]
percent
5
3800 (63)
rpm (rps)
reference
3800 (63)
rpm (rps)
reference
126.7
Hz
max.
3.0
A rms
max. [1]
9.6
A rms
nominal
240
V rms
reference
250
V rms
maximum
1.0 (1.3)
kWatts (hp)
min. [1]
68
mH
± 30%
7.0
ohms
± 10 % [1]
74150
rads/sec2
Theoretical
5.45 (99.6)
oz-in2 (kgm2 ∗ 1E-6)
nominal
0.960 (0.0068)
oz-in/krpm (Nm/krpm)
nominal
9.0 (4.08)
lbs. (kg)
max.
170°C (338°F) [4] °C (°F)
max.
145°C (293°F)
°C (°F)
reference
H
—
reference
170°C (338°F)
°C (°F)
± 5° C
135°C (275°F)
°C (°F)
± 10° C
1750
VAC
min.
0.00122
µF
max.
65 [8]
rated
standard
14E-6 (80E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
8.0E-6 (45E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
35
RC-#30
—
reference
36
NdFeB
—
—
37
85.4 (380)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
67.8 (302)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
59.1 (263)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
53.8 (239)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
50 (222)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
38
N
ISO 2373
Standard
39
1/Class 3
ABEC/AFBMA
reference
40
SRI #2
Manufacturer
reference
41
3 (0.21)
psi (kg/cm2)
max.
42
3 phase wye connected 2(P/2)
43
A-C-B (viewed from front face plate)
44
Industrial Drives B-202-B
45
Single-Speed; Rotor-Excited; ± 10 arc min.;
Resolution is 4096 counts/rev post-quadrature
46
Resolver Manufacturer/Model #
Fasco # 21-BRCX-335-J39
47
Standard Resolver Cable Part Number
71-011777-xx
48
Standard Motor Cable Part Number
71-011774-xx
49
Options:
Brake—24VDC (0.57A)—845 oz-in (5.97 Nm) Holding Torque
(requires resolver
IP67 Classification
No Keyway
cable 71-014082-xx)
Incremental Encoder
Shaft Modifications
Tachometer
IP65 Shaft Seal
[1] 25°C (77°F) Ambient
[5] Rotor steel is rated as fatigue proof
[2] 40°C (104°F) Ambient
[6] Loads centered 1 inch from mounting flange
[3] Measured at 60 rpm (1 rps) in Velocity Mode
[7] Loads may be radial and axial such that the sum of the
[4] Rated for 20,000 Hours or 40,000 Hours
radial and two times the axial does not exceed this figure.
@ 155° C (311°F)
[8] Motor shaft is IP30 rated.
APEX603 Motor Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
100
Motor Size:
Constant (s):
APEX603
Torque
Voltage (Sinusoidal)
Electrical Time
Mechanical Time
Thermal
Torque (s):
Continuous, Stall
(NOTE: Values are with Continuous, Stall
rated and peak current, Continuous, Rated
lines 15 & 16 below.
Peak, Max w/o Saturation
Drive current, and thus Static Friction
torque, may be lower.) Ripple (of Rated Torque)
Speed:
Rated
Maximum
Frequency
Rated
Current:
Rated
Peak
Voltage:
Rated
Max
Output Power
Rated
Inductance
Terminal (line-line)
D.C. Resistance
Terminal (line-line)
Acceleration at Rated Torque
Rotor Inertia
Damping
Weight
Winding Temperature
Winding Temperature Rise (Above Ambient) [1]
Insulation Class
Thermostat TRIP Temperature
Thermostat RESET Temperature
Dielectric Strength, (Winding-to-Frame)
Winding Capacitance-to-Frame
IP Classification
Shaft:
Radial-Play
At End
At Faceplate
Material [5]
Magnet Type
Loading [6]
1000 rpm (17 rps)
2000 rpm (33 rps)
3000 rpm (50 rps)
4000 rpm (67 rps)
5000 rpm (83 rps)
Motor Vibration
Bearing Class, Internal/External
Bearing Grease
Shaft Seal Pressure
Basic Motor Design
Stator Phase Sequence
Vendor/Supplier
Resolver Type/Accuracy
APEX615n Installation Guide
APEX604
Value
Units
Tolerance
Torque
52.6 (0.37)
oz-in/A rms (Nm/A rms)
± 10%
Voltage (Sinusoidal)
22.5
V rms/Krpm
± 10%
Electrical Time
58.7
milliseconds
nominal
Mechanical Time
1.30
milliseconds
nominal
Thermal
12
minutes
nominal
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
Torque (s):
Continuous, Stall
334 (2.36)
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
315 (2.22)
(NOTE: Values are with Continuous, Stall
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
269 (1.90)
rated and peak current, Continuous, Rated
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
899 (6.35)
lines 15 & 16 below.
Peak, Max w/o Saturation
max.
oz-in (Nm)
9.6 (0.07)
Drive current, and thus Static Friction
max. [3]
percent
5
torque, may be lower.) Ripple (of Rated Torque)
Speed:
Rated
7500 (125)
rpm (rps)
reference
Maximum
7500 (125)
rpm (rps)
reference
Frequency
Rated
250
Hz
max.
Current:
Rated
6.0
A rms
max. [1]
Peak
18.8
A rms
nominal
Voltage:
Rated
240
V rms
reference
Max
250
V rms
maximum
Output Power
Rated
1.5 (2.0)
kWatts (hp)
min. [1]
Inductance
Terminal (line-line)
9.4
mH
± 30%
D.C. Resistance
Terminal (line-line)
1.6
ohms
± 10 % [1]
Acceleration at Rated Torque
82980
rads/sec2
Theoretical
Rotor Inertia
4.18 (76.5)
oz-in2 (kgm2 ∗ 1E-6)
nominal
Damping
0.580 (0.0041)
oz-in/krpm (Nm/krpm)
nominal
Weight
8.5 (3.86)
lbs. (kg)
max.
Winding Temperature
170°C (338°F) [4] °C (°F)
max.
Winding Temperature Rise (Above Ambient) [1]
145°C (293°F)
°C (°F)
reference
Insulation Class
H
—
reference
Thermostat TRIP Temperature
170°C (338°F)
°C (°F)
± 5° C
Thermostat RESET Temperature
135°C (275°F)
°C (°F)
± 10° C
Dielectric Strength, (Winding-to-Frame)
1750
VAC
min.
Winding Capacitance-to-Frame
0.00122
µF
max.
IP Classification
65 [8]
rated
standard
Shaft:
Radial-Play
At End
12E-6 (68E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
At Faceplate
5.6E-6 (32E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
35
Material [5]
RC-#30
—
—
36
Magnet Type
NdFeB
—
—
37
Loading [6]
1000 rpm (17 rps)
84 (374)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
2000 rpm (33 rps)
67 (298)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
3000 rpm (50 rps)
58 (258)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
4000 rpm (67 rps)
53 (236)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
5000 rpm (83 rps)
49 (218)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
38
Bearing Class, Internal/External
1/Class 3
ABEC/AFBMA
reference
39
Bearing Grease
SRI #2
Manufacturer
reference
40
Shaft Seal Pressure
3 (0.21)
psi (kg/cm2)
max.
41
Basic Motor Design
3 phase wye connected 2(P/2)
42
Stator Phase Sequence
A-C-B (viewed from front face plate)
43
Vendor/Supplier
Industrial Drives B-106-B
44
Resolver Type/Accuracy
Single-Speed; Rotor-Excited; ± 10 arc min.
45
Resolver Manufacturer/Model #
Fasco # 21-BRCX-335-J39
46
Standard Resolver Cable Part Number
71-013862-xx
47
Standard Motor Cable Part Number
71-013863-xx
48
Options:
Brake—24VDC (0.57A)—326 oz-in (2.3 Nm) Holding Torque
IP67 Classification
Incremental Encoder
Tachometer
No Keyway
[1] 25°C (77°F) Ambient
[5] Rotor steel is rated as fatigue proof
[2] 40°C (104°F) Ambient
[6] Loads centered 1 inch from mounting flange
[3] Measured at 60 rpm (1 rps) in Velocity Mode
[7] Loads may be radial and axial such that the sum of the
[4] Rated for 20,000 Hours or 40,000 Hours
radial and two times the axial does not exceed this figure.
@ 155° C (311°F)
[8] Motor shaft is IP30 rated.
APEX604 Motor Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Motor Size:
Constant (s):
Appendix C
101
APEX605
Value
Units
Tolerance
Torque
68.7 (0.49)
oz-in/A rms (Nm/A rms)
± 10%
Voltage (Sinusoidal)
29.4
V rms/Krpm
± 10%
Electrical Time
10.68
milliseconds
nominal
Mechanical Time
1.46
milliseconds
nominal
Thermal
18
minutes
nominal
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
Torque (s):
Continuous, Stall
367 (2.59)
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
346 (2.44)
(NOTE: Values are with Continuous, Stall
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
321 (2.27)
rated and peak current, Continuous, Rated
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
1085 (7.66)
lines 15 & 16 below.
Peak, Max w/o Saturation
max.
oz-in (Nm)
0.96 (0.007)
Drive current, and thus Static Friction
max. [3]
percent
5
torque, may be lower.) Ripple (of Rated Torque)
Speed:
Rated
6200 (103)
rpm (rps)
reference
Maximum
6200 (103)
rpm (rps)
reference
Frequency
Rated
207
Hz
max.
Current:
Rated
5
A rms
max. [1]
Peak
16.6
A rms
nominal
Voltage:
Rated
240
V rms
reference
Max
250
V rms
maximum
Output Power
Rated
1.5 (2.0)
kWatts (hp)
min. [1]
Inductance
Terminal (line-line)
25
mH
± 30%
D.C. Resistance
Terminal (line-line)
2.3
ohms
± 10 % [1]
Acceleration at Rated Torque
76870
rads/sec2
Theoretical
Rotor Inertia
5.43 (99.6)
oz-in2 (kgm2 ∗ 1E-6)
nominal
Damping
0.96 (0.0068)
oz-in/krpm (Nm/krpm)
nominal
Weight
10 (4.5)
lbs. (kg)
max.
Winding Temperature
170°C (338°F) [4] °C (°F)
max.
Winding Temperature Rise (Above Ambient) [1]
145°C (293°F)
°C (°F)
reference
Insulation Class
H
—
reference
Thermostat TRIP Temperature
170°C (338°F)
°C (°F)
± 5° C
Thermostat RESET Temperature
135°C (275°F)
°C (°F)
± 10° C
Dielectric Strength, (Winding-to-Frame)
1750
VAC
min.
Winding Capacitance-to-Frame
0.00122
µF
max.
IP Classification
65 [8]
rated
standard
Shaft:
Radial-Play
At End
14E-6 (80E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
At Faceplate
8E-6 (45E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
35
Material [5]
RC-#30
—
—
36
Magnet Type
NdFeB
—
—
37
Loading [6]
1000 rpm (17 rps)
85.4 (380)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
2000 rpm (33 rps)
67.8 (301)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
3000 rpm (50 rps)
59.1 (263)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
4000 rpm (67 rps)
53.8 (239)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
5000 rpm (83 rps)
50 (222)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
38
Bearing Class, Internal/External
1/Class 3
ABEC/AFBMA
reference
39
Bearing Grease
SRI #2
Manufacturer
reference
40
Shaft Seal Pressure
3 (0.21)
psi (kg/cm2)
max.
41
Basic Motor Design
3 phase wye connected 2(P/2)
42
Stator Phase Sequence
A-C-B (viewed from front face plate)
43
Vendor/Supplier
Industrial Drives B-202-C
44
Resolver Type/Accuracy
Single-Speed; Rotor-Excited; ± 10 arc min.
45
Resolver Manufacturer/Model #
Fasco # 21-BRCX-335-J39
46
Standard Resolver Cable Part Number
71-013862-xx
47
Standard Motor Cable Part Number
71-013863-xx
48
Options:
Brake—24VDC (0.57A)—850 oz-in (6.0 Nm) Holding Torque
IP67 Classification
Incremental Encoder
Tachometer
No Keyway
[1] 25°C (77°F) Ambient
[5] Rotor steel is rated as fatigue proof
[2] 40°C (104°F) Ambient
[6] Loads centered 1 inch from mounting flange
[3] Measured at 60 rpm (1 rps) in Velocity Mode
[7] Loads may be radial and axial such that the sum of the
[4] Rated for 20,000 Hours or 40,000 Hours
radial and two times the axial does not exceed this figure.
@ 155° C (311°F)
[8] Motor shaft is IP30 rated.
APEX605 Motor Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
102
Motor Size:
Constant (s):
APEX615n Installation Guide
APEX606
Value
Units
Tolerance
Torque
120 (0.85)
oz-in/A rms (Nm/A rms)
± 10%
Voltage (Sinusoidal)
51.2
V rms/Krpm
± 10%
Electrical Time
15.32
milliseconds
nominal
Mechanical Time
0.896
milliseconds
nominal
Thermal
20
minutes
nominal
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
Torque (s):
Continuous, Stall
672 (4.75)
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
634 (4.48)
(NOTE: Values are with Continuous, Stall
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
576 (4.07)
rated and peak current, Continuous, Rated
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
1957 (13.82)
lines 15 & 16 below.
Peak, Max w/o Saturation
max
oz-in (Nm)
0.96 (0.007)
Drive current, and thus Static Friction
max. [3]
percent
5
torque, may be lower.) Ripple (of Rated Torque)
Speed:
Rated
3600 (60)
rpm (rps)
reference
Maximum
3600 (60)
rpm (rps)
reference
Frequency
Rated
120
Hz
max.
Current:
Rated
5.3
A rms
max. [1]
Peak
17.2
A rms
nominal
Voltage:
Rated
240
V rms
reference
Max
250
V rms
maximum
Output Power:
Rated
1.6 (2.1)
kWatts (hp)
min. [1]
Inductance:
Terminal (line-line)
38
mH
± 30%
D.C. Resistance
Terminal (line-line)
2.48
ohms
± 10 % [1]
Acceleration at Rated Torque
80000
rads/sec2
Theoretical
Rotor Inertia
9.44 (172.9)
oz-in2 (kgm2 ∗ 1E-6)
nominal
Damping
1.344 (0.0095)
oz-in/krpm (Nm/krpm)
nominal
Weight
13.4 (6.1)
lbs. (kg)
max.
Winding Temperature
170°C (338°F) [4] °C (°F)
max.
Winding Temperature Rise (Above Ambient) [1]
145°C (293°F)
°C (°F)
reference
Insulation Class
H
—
reference
Thermostat TRIP Temperature
170°C (338°F)
°C (°F)
± 5 °C
Thermostat RESET Temperature
135°C (275°F)
°C (°F)
± 10 °C
Dielectric Strength, (Winding-to-Frame)
1750
VAC
min.
Winding Capacitance to Frame
0.00201
µF
max.
IP Classification
65 [8]
rated
standard
Shaft:
Radial-Play
At End
14E-6 (80E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
At Faceplate
8E-6 (45E-9)
In/lb (m/N)
reference
35
Material [5]
RC-#30
—
—
36
Magnet Type
NdFeB
—
—
37
Loading [6]
1000 rpm (17 rps)
90.1 (401)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
2000 rpm (33 rps)
71.6 (318)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
3000 rpm (50 rps)
62.4 (278)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
4000 rpm (67 rps)
N/A
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
5000 rpm (83 rps)
N/A
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
38
Bearing Class, Internal/External
1/Class 3
ABEC/AFBMA
reference
39
Bearing Grease
SRI #2
Manufacturer
reference
40
Shaft Seal Pressure
3 (0.21)
psi (kg/cm2)
max.
41
Basic Motor Design
3 phase wye connected 2(P/2)
42
Stator Phase Sequence
A-C-B (viewed from front face plate)
43
Vendor/Supplier
Industrial Drives B-204-B
44
Resolver Type/Accuracy
Single-Speed; Rotor-Excited; ± 10 arc min.
45
Resolver Manufacturer/Model #
Fasco # 21-BRCX-335-J39
46
Standard Resolver Cable Part Number
71-013862-xx
47
Standard Motor Cable Part Number
71-013863-xx
48
Options:
Brake—24VDC (0.57A)—850 oz-in (6.0 NM) Holding Torque
IP67 Classification
Incremental Encoder
Tachometer
No Keyway
[1] 25°C (77°F) Ambient
[5] Rotor steel is rated as fatigue proof
[2] 40°C (104°F) Ambient
[6] Loads centered 1 inch from mounting flange
[3] Measured at 60 rpm (1 rps) in Velocity Mode
[7] Loads may be radial and axial such that the sum of the radial
[4] Rated for 20,000 Hours or 40,000 Hours
and two times the axial does not exceed this figure.
@ 155° C (311°F)
[8] Motor shaft is IP30 rated.
APEX606 Motor Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Motor Size:
Constant (s):
Appendix C
103
APEX610
Value
Units
Tolerance
Torque
61.4 (0.43)
oz-in/A rms (Nm/A rms)
± 10%
Voltage (Sinusoidal)
26.2
V rms/Krpm
±10%
Electrical Time
13.16
milliseconds
nominal
Mechanical Time
0.762
milliseconds
nominal
Thermal
21
minutes
nominal
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
Torque (s):
Continuous, Stall
977 (6.90)
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
921.6 (6.51)
(NOTE: Values are with Continuous, Stall
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
653 (4.61)
rated and peak current, Continuous, Rated
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
2630 (18.57)
lines 15 & 16 below.
Peak, Max w/o Saturation
max
oz-in (Nm)
0.96 (0.007)
Drive current, and thus Static Friction
min. [3]
percent
5
torque, may be lower.) Ripple (of Rated Torque)
Speed:
Rated
7000 (117)
rpm (rps)
reference
Maximum
7000 (117)
rpm (rps)
reference
Frequency
Rated
233
Hz
max.
Current:
Rated
15
A rms
max. [1]
Peak
45
A rms
nominal
Voltage:
Rated
230
V rms
reference
Max
250
V rms
maximum
Output Power:
Rated
3.3 (4.5)
kWatts (hp)
min. [1]
Inductance:
Terminal (line-line)
5
mH
± 30%
D.C. Resistance
Terminal (line-line)
0.38
ohms
± 10 % [1]
Acceleration at Rated Torque
73934
rads/sec2
Theoretical
Rotor Inertia
13.72 (251.2)
oz-in2 (kgm2 ∗ 1E-6)
nominal
Damping
1.728 (0.0122)
oz-in/krpm (Nm/krpm)
nominal
Weight
16.35 (7.43)
lbs. (kg)
max.
Winding Temperature
170°C (338°F) [4] °C (°F)
max.
Winding Temperature Rise (Above Ambient) [1]
145°C (293°F)
°C (°F)
reference
Insulation Class
H
—
reference
Thermostat TRIP Temperature
170°C (338°F)
°C (°F)
± 5 °C
Thermostat RESET Temperature
135°C (275°F)
°C (°F)
± 10 °C
Dielectric Strength, (Winding-to-Frame)
1750
VAC
min.
Winding Capacitance-to-Frame
0.00205
µF
max.
IP Classification
65 [8]
rated
standard
Shaft:
Radial-Play
At End
14E-6 (80E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
At Faceplate
8E-6 (45E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
35
Material [5]
RC-#30
36
Magnet Type
NdFeB
37
Loading [6]
1000 rpm (17 rps)
93.5 (416)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
2000 rpm (33 rps)
74.2 (330)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
3000 rpm (50 rps)
64.8 (288)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
4000 rpm (67 rps)
59 (262)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
5000 rpm (83 rps)
54.7 (243)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
38
Bearing Class, Internal/External
1/Class 3
ABEC/AFBMA
reference
39
Bearing Grease
SRI #2
Manufacturer
reference
40
Shaft Seal Pressure
3 (0.21)
psi (kg/cm2)
max.
41
Basic Motor Design
3 phase wye connected 2(P/2)
42
Stator Phase Sequence
A-C-B (viewed from front face plate)
43
Vendor/Supplier
Industrial Drives B-206-D
44
Resolver Type/Accuracy
Single-Speed; Rotor-Excited; ± 10 arc min.
45
Resolver Manufacturer/Model #
Fasco # 21-BRCX-335-J39
46
Standard Resolver Cable Part Number
71-013862-xx
47
Standard Motor Cable Part Number
71-013864-xx
48
Options:
Brake—24VDC (0.57A)—850 oz-in (6.0 Nm) Holding Torque
IP67 Classification
Incremental Encoder
Tachometer
No Keyway
[1] 25°C (77°F) Ambient
[5] Rotor steel is rated as fatigue proof
[2] 40°C (104°F) Ambient
[6] Loads centered 1 inch from mounting flange
[3] Measured at 60 rpm (1 rps) in Velocity Mode
[7] Loads may be radial and axial such that the sum of the
[4] Rated for 20,000 Hours or 40,000 Hours
radial and two times the axial does not exceed this figure.
@ 155° C (311°F)
[8] Motor shaft is IP30 rated.
APEX610 Motor Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
104
Motor Size:
Constant (s):
APEX615n Installation Guide
APEX620
Value
Units
Tolerance
Torque
124.2 (0.877)
oz-in/A rms (Nm/A rms)
± 10%
Voltage (Sinusoidal)
53
V rms/Krpm
± 10%
Electrical Time
23.4
milliseconds
nominal
Mechanical Time
0.82
milliseconds
nominal
Thermal
22
minutes
nominal
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
Torque (s):
Continuous, Stall
1974 (13.94)
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
1862 (13.15)
(NOTE: Values are with Continuous, Stall
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
1632 (11.52)
rated and peak current, Continuous, Rated
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
5299 (37.42)
lines 15 & 16 below.
Peak, Max w/o Saturation
max.
oz-in (Nm)
25 (0.176)
Drive current, and thus Static Friction
min. [3]
percent
4.5
torque, may be lower.) Ripple (of Rated Torque)
Speed:
Rated
3700 (62)
rpm (rps)
reference
Maximum
3700 (62)
rpm (rps)
reference
Frequency
Rated
123
Hz
max.
Current:
Rated
15
A rms
max. [1]
Peak
45
A rms
nominal
Voltage:
Rated
230
V rms
reference
Max
250
V rms
maximum
Output Power:
Rated
4.5 (6)
kWatts (hp)
min. [1]
Inductance:
Terminal (line-line)
15
mH
± 30%
D.C. Resistance
Terminal (line-line)
0.64
Ohms
± 10 % [1]
Acceleration at Rated Torque
57025
rads/sec2
Theoretical
Rotor Inertia
35.8 (656)
oz-in2 (kgm2 ∗ 1E-6)
nominal
Damping
2.496 (0.0176)
oz-in/krpm (Nm/krpm)
nominal
Weight
29 (13.2)
lbs. (kg)
max.
Winding Temperature
170°C (338°F) [4] °C (°F)
max.
Winding Temperature Rise (Above Ambient) [1]
145°C (293°F)
°C (°F)
reference
Insulation Class
H
—
reference
Thermostat TRIP Temperature
170°C (338°F)
°C (°F)
± 5 °C
Thermostat RESET Temperature
135°C (275°F)
°C (°F)
± 10 °C
Dielectric Strength, (Winding-to-Frame)
1750
VAC
min.
Winding Capacitance-to-Frame
0.0034
µF
max.
IP Classification
65 [8]
rated
standard
Shaft:
Radial-Play
At End
20E-6 (114E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
At Faceplate
7E-6 (40E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
35
Material [5]
RC-#30
—
—
36
Magnet Type
NdFeB
—
—
37
Loading [6]
1000 rpm (17 rps)
154.7 (688)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
2000 rpm (33 rps)
122.8 (546)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
3000 rpm (50 rps)
107.2 (477)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
4000 rpm (67 rps)
N/A
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
5000 rpm (83 rps)
N/A
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
38
Bearing Class, Internal/External
1/Class 3
ABEC/AFBMA
reference
39
Bearing Grease
SRI #2
Manufacturer
reference
40
Shaft Seal Pressure
3 (0.21)
psi (kg/cm2)
max.
41
Basic Motor Design
3 phase wye connected 2(P/2)
42
Stator Phase Sequence
A-C-B (viewed from front face plate)
43
Vendor/Supplier
Industrial Drives B-404-D
44
Resolver Type/Accuracy
Single-Speed; Rotor-Excited; ± 10 arc min.
45
Resolver Manufacturer/Model #
Fasco # 21-BRCX-335-J39
46
Standard Resolver Cable Part Number
71-013862-xx
47
Standard Motor Cable Part Number
71-013864-xx
48
Options:
Brake—24VDC (0.93A)—1130 oz-in (8.0 Nm) Holding Torque
IP67 Classification
Incremental Encoder
Tachometer
No Keyway
[1] 25°C (77°F) Ambient
[5] Rotor steel is rated as fatigue proof
[2] 40°C (104°F) Ambient
[6] Loads centered 1 inch from mounting flange
[3] Measured at 60 rpm (1 rps) in Velocity Mode
[7] Loads may be radial and axial such that the sum of the
[4] Rated for 20,000 Hours or 40,000 Hours
radial and two times the axial does not exceed this figure.
@ 155° C (311°F)
[8] Motor shaft is IP30 rated.
APEX620 Motor Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Motor Size:
Constant (s):
Appendix C
105
APEX630
Value
Units
Tolerance
Torque
175.3 (1.24)
oz-in/A rms (Nm/A rms)
± 10%
Voltage (Sinusoidal)
74.9
V rms/Krpm
± 10%
Electrical Time
26.7
milliseconds
nominal
Mechanical Time
0.68
milliseconds
nominal
Thermal
28
minutes
nominal
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
Torque (s):
Continuous, Stall
2788 (19.69)
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
2630 (18.57)
(NOTE: Values are with Continuous, Stall
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
2304 (16.27)
rated and peak current, Continuous, Rated
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
7488 (52.88)
lines 15 & 16 below.
Peak, Max w/o Saturation
max.
oz-in (Nm)
40.7 (0.287)
Drive current, and thus Static Friction
min. [3]
percent
4.5
torque, may be lower.) Ripple (of Rated Torque)
Speed:
Rated
2500 (42)
rpm (rps)
reference
Maximum
2500 (42)
rpm (rps)
reference
Frequency
Rated
83
Hz
max.
Current:
Rated
15
A rms
max. [1]
Peak
45
A rms
nominal
Voltage:
Rated
230
V rms
reference
Max
250
V rms
maximum
Output Power:
Rated
4.3 (5.7)
kWatts (hp)
min. [1]
Inductance:
Terminal (line-line)
20
mH
± 30%
D.C. Resistance
Terminal (line-line)
0.75
Ohms
± 10 % [1]
Acceleration at Rated Torque
56934
rads/sec2
Theoretical
Rotor Inertia
50.7 (929)
oz-in2 (kgm2 ∗ 1E-6)
nominal
Damping
2.88 (0.020)
oz-in/krpm (Nm/krpm)
nominal
Weight
32 (14.5)
lbs. (kg)
max.
Winding Temperature
170°C (338°F) [4] °C (°F)
max.
Winding Temperature Rise (Above Ambient) [1]
145°C (293°F)
°C (°F)
reference
Insulation Class
H
—
reference
Thermostat TRIP Temperature
170°C (338°F)
°C (°F)
± 5 °C
Thermostat RESET Temperature
135°C (275°F)
°C (°F)
± 5 °C
Dielectric Strength, (Winding-to-Frame)
1750
VAC
min.
Winding Capacitance to Frame
0.0038
µF
max.
IP Classification
65 [8]
rated
standard
Shaft:
Radial-Play
At End
20E-6 (114E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
At Faceplate
7E-6 (40E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
35
Material [5]
RC-#30
—
—
36
Magnet Type
NdFeB
—
—
37
Loading [6]
1000 rpm (17 rps)
160 (712)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
2000 rpm (33 rps)
127.1 (565)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
3000 rpm (50 rps)
N/A
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
4000 rpm (67 rps)
N/A
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
5000 rpm (83 rps)
N/A
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
38
Bearing Class, Internal/External
1/Class 3
ABEC/AFBMA
reference
39
Bearing Grease
SRI #2
Manufacturer
reference
40
Shaft Seal Pressure
3 (0.21)
psi (kg/cm2)
max.
41
Basic Motor Design
3 phase wye connected 2(P/2)
42
Stator Phase Sequence—CW rotor rotation
A-C-B (viewed from front face plate)
43
Vendor/Supplier
Industrial Drives B-406-D
44
Resolver Type/Accuracy
Single-Speed; Rotor-Excited; ± 10 arc min.
45
Resolver Manufacturer/Model #
Fasco # 21-BRCX-335-J39
46
Standard Resolver Cable Part Number
71-013862-xx
47
Standard Motor Cable Part Number
71-013864-xx
48
Options:
Brake—24VDC (0.93A)—1130 oz-in (8.0 Nm) Holding Torque
IP67 Classification
Incremental Encoder
Tachometer
No Keyway
[1] 25°C (77°F) Ambient
[5] Rotor steel is rated as fatigue proof
[2] 40°C (104°F) Ambient
[6] Loads centered 1 inch from mounting flange
[3] Measured at 60 rpm (1 rps) in Velocity Mode
[7] Loads may be radial and axial such that the sum of the
[4] Rated for 20,000 Hours or 40,000 Hours
radial and two times the axial does not exceed this figure.
@ 155° C (311°F)
[8] Motor shaft is IP30 rated.
APEX630 Motor Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
106
Motor Size:
Constant (s):
APEX615n Installation Guide
APEX635
Value
Units
Tolerance
Torque
164.0 (1.158)
oz-in/A rms (Nm/A rms)
± 10%
Voltage (Sinusoidal)
70
V rms/Krpm
± 10%
Electrical Time
0.77
milliseconds
nominal
Mechanical Time
20.8
milliseconds
nominal
Thermal
28
minutes
nominal
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
Torque (s):
Continuous, Stall
2605 (18.39)
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
2458 (17.36)
(NOTE: Values are with Continuous, Stall
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
2054 (14.50)
rated and peak current, Continuous, Rated
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
7008 (49.49)
lines 15 & 16 below.
Peak, Max w/o Saturation
max.
oz-in (Nm)
69 (0.49)
Drive current, and thus Static Friction
min. [3]
percent
4.5
torque, may be lower.) Ripple (of Rated Torque)
Speed:
Rated
3000 (50)
rpm (rps)
reference
Maximum
3000 (50)
rpm (rps)
reference
Frequency
Rated
150
Hz
max.
Current:
Rated
15
A rms
max. [1]
Peak
45
A rms
nominal
Voltage:
Rated
230
V rms
reference
Max
250
V rms
maximum
Output Power:
Rated
4.5 (6.1)
kWatts (hp)
min. [1]
Inductance:
Terminal (line-line)
14
mH
± 30%
D.C. Resistance
Terminal (line-line)
0.647
Ohms
± 10 % [1]
Acceleration at Rated Torque
48945
rads/sec2
Theoretical
Rotor Inertia
56.1 (1028)
oz-in2 (kgm2 ∗ 1E-6)
nominal
Damping
2.88 (0.020)
oz-in/krpm (Nm/krpm)
nominal
Weight
37 (16.8)
lbs. (kg)
max.
Winding Temperature
170°C (338°F) [4] °C (°F)
max.
Winding Temperature Rise (Above Ambient) [1]
145°C (293°F)
°C (°F)
reference
Insulation Class
H
—
reference
Thermostat TRIP Temperature
170°C (338°F)
°C (°F)
± 5 °C
Thermostat RESET Temperature
135°C (275°F)
°C (°F)
± 5 °C
Dielectric Strength, (Winding-to-Frame)
1750
VAC
min.
Winding Capacitance to Frame
0.0038
µF
max.
IP Classification
65
rated
standard
Shaft:
Radial-Play
At End
20E-6 (114E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
At Faceplate
7E-6 (40E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
35
Material [5]
RC-#30
36
Magnet Type
NdFeB
37
Loading [6]
1000 rpm (17 rps)
243.5 (1,083)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
2000 rpm (33 rps)
193.3 (860)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
3000 rpm (50 rps)
168.8 (751)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
4000 rpm (67 rps)
N/A
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
5000 rpm (83 rps)
N/A
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
38
Bearing Class, Internal/External
1/Class 3
ABEC/AFBMA
reference
39
Bearing Grease
SRI #2
Manufacturer
reference
40
Shaft Seal Pressure
3 (0.21)
psi (kg/cm2)
max.
41
Basic Motor Design
3 phase wye connected 2(P/2)
42
Stator Phase Sequence—CW rotor rotation
A-C-B (viewed from front face plate)
43
Vendor/Supplier
Industrial Drives B-602-C
44
Resolver Type/Accuracy
Single-Speed; Rotor-Excited; ± 10 arc min.
45
Resolver Manufacturer/Model #
Fasco # 21-BRCX-335-J39
46
Standard Resolver Cable Part Number
71-013862-xx
47
Standard Motor Cable Part Number
71-013865-xx
48
Options:
Brake—24VDC (0.93A)— 1130 oz-in(8.0 Nm) Holding Torque
IP67 Classification
Incremental Encoder
Tachometer
No Keyway
[1] 25°C (77°F) Ambient
[5] Rotor steel is rated as fatigue proof
[2] 40°C (104°F) Ambient
[6] Loads centered 1 inch from mounting flange
[3] Measured at 60 rpm (1 rps) in Velocity Mode
[7] Loads may be radial and axial such that the sum of the
[4] Rated for 20,000 Hours or 40,000 Hours
radial and two times the axial does not exceed this figure.
@ 155° C (311°F)
[8] Motor shaft is IP30 rated.
APEX635 Motor Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Motor Size:
Constant (s):
Appendix C
107
APEX640
Value
Units
Tolerance
Torque
291.5 (2.06)
oz-in/A rms (Nm/A rms)
± 10%
Voltage (Sinusoidal)
124.5
V rms/Krpm
± 10%
Electrical Time
26.2
milliseconds
nominal
Mechanical Time
0.55
milliseconds
nominal
Thermal
33
minutes
nominal
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
Torque (s):
Continuous, Stall
4640 (32.76)
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
4378 (30.92)
(NOTE: Values are with Continuous, Stall
min. [2]
oz-in (Nm)
3955 (27.93)
rated and peak current, Continuous, Rated
min. [1]
oz-in (Nm)
12461 (87.99)
lines 15 & 16 below.
Peak, Max w/o Saturation
max.
oz-in (Nm)
73 (0.52)
Drive current, and thus Static Friction
max. [3]
percent
4.5
torque, may be lower.) Ripple (of Rated Torque)
Speed:
Rated
1600 (27)
rpm (rps)
reference
Maximum
1600 (27)
rpm (rps)
reference
Frequency
Rated
80
Hz
max.
Current:
Rated
15
A rms
max. [1]
Peak
45
A rms
nominal
Voltage:
Rated
230
V rms
reference
Max
250
V rms
maximum
Output Power:
Rated
4.7 (6.3)
kWatts (hp)
min. [1]
Inductance:
Terminal (line-line)
20
mH
± 30%
D.C. Resistance
Terminal (line-line)
0.763
Ohms
± 10 % [1]
Acceleration at Rated Torque
43667
rads/sec2
Theoretical
Rotor Inertia
111.0 (2034)
oz-in2 (kgm2 ∗ 1E-6)
nominal
Damping
15.36 (0.1085)
oz-in/krpm (Nm/krpm)
nominal
Weight
51 (23.2)
lbs. (kg)
max.
Winding Temperature
170°C (338°F) [4] °C (°F)
max.
Winding Temperature Rise (Above Ambient) [1]
145°C (293°F)
°C (°F)
reference
Insulation Class
H
—
reference
Thermostat TRIP Temperature
170°C (338°F)
°C (°F)
± 5 °C
Thermostat RESET Temperature
135°C (275°F)
°C (°F)
± 10 °C
Dielectric Strength, (Winding-to-Frame)
1750
VAC
min.
Winding Capacitance to Frame
0.0082
µF
max.
IP Classification
65 [8]
rated
standard
Shaft:
Radial-Play
At End
10E-6 (57E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
At Faceplate
4E-6 (23E-9)
in/lb (m/N)
reference
35
Material [5]
RC-#30
—
—
36
Magnet Type
NdFeB
—
—
37
Loading [6]
1000 rpm (17 rps)
255.6 (1,130)
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
2000 rpm (33 rps)
N/A
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
3000 rpm (50 rps)
N/A
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
4000 rpm (67 rps)
N/A
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
5000 rpm (83 rps)
N/A
lbs. (N)
max. [7]
38
Bearing Class, Internal/External
1/Class 3
ABEC/AFBMA
reference
39
Bearing Grease
SRI #2
Manufacturer
reference
40
Shaft Seal Pressure
3 (0.21)
psi (kg/cm2)
max.
41
Basic Motor Design
3 phase wye connected 3(P/2)
42
Stator Phase Sequence—CW rotor rotation
A-C-B (viewed from front face plate)
43
Vendor/Supplier
Industrial Drives B-604-D
44
Resolver Type/Accuracy
Single-Speed; Rotor-Excited; ± 10 arc min.
45
Resolver Manufacturer/Model #
Fasco # 21-BRCX-335-J39
46
Standard Resolver Cable Part Number
71-013862-xx
47
Standard Motor Cable Part Number
71-013865-xx
48
Options:
Brake—24VDC (1.27A)—6800 oz-in (48 Nm) Holding Torque
IP67 Classification
Incremental Encoder
Tachometer No Keyway
[1] 25°C (77°F) Ambient
[5] Rotor steel is rated as fatigue proof
[2] 40°C (104°F) Ambient
[6] Loads centered 1 inch from mounting flange
[3] Measured at 60 rpm (1 rps) in Velocity Mode
[7] Loads may be radial and axial such that the sum of the
[4] Rated for 20,000 Hours or 40,000 Hours
radial and two times the axial does not exceed this figure.
@ 155° C (311°F)
[8] Motor shaft is IP30 rated.
APEX640 Motor Specifications
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
108
Motor Size:
Constant (s):
APEX615n Installation Guide
Appendix D
LVD Installation Instructions
For more information about LVD, see 73/23/EEC and 93/68/EEC, published by the European
Economic Community (EEC).
Environmental Conditions
Pollution Degree
APEX615n Controller/Drives are designed for pollution degree 2.
Installation Category
APEX615n Controller/Drives are designed for installation category II.
Electrical
Connecting and Disconnecting Power Mains
The APEX615n Controller/Drive's protective earth connection is provided through its power
mains connector. You must reliably earth the APEX615n Controller/Drive's protective earth
connection.
Attach or remove the APEX615n Controller/Drive's power plug only while input power is
OFF.
Using an Isolation Transformer
The APEX615n Controller/Drive's mains voltage is limited to 240 VAC nominal. If your
mains voltage is higher, use an isolation transformer located between the power mains and the
APEX615n Controller/Drive. Your isolation transformer should be insulated to ~2300V rms.
Do not interrupt the protective earth conductor between the source mains and the isolation
transformer's secondary. The core of the isolation transformer and the drive's protective
conductor terminal must both be connected to the main's protective earth conductor.
CAUTION
Do not use an autotransformer.
Line Fuses
Line fuses need to be added to protect the transformer and associated wiring. If the live wire
cannot be readily identified, fuse both phase conductors. The value of fuse required is given by:
(1.5 x VA)/(supply volts) [amps]
Fuse types should be anti-surge HBC.
WARNING
Safety Ground (Earth Ground) should never be fused.
Connecting the Protective Conductor Terminal to Earth
You must provide a connection from the APEX615n Controller/Drive's protective conductor
terminal to the protective earth conductor of the mains. This connection is in addition to the
protective earth connection provided through the APEX615n Controller/Drive's mains
connector.
The protective conductor terminal is marked with a label on the product bearing the following
symbol:
Protective Conductor Terminal Marking
To connect the protective conductor terminal to earth, complete these steps:
1
2
3
Use a spade lug in combination with a star washer to make good contact with the bare
metal surface of the APEX615n Controller/Drive.
Use a green and yellow wire to reliably earth the protective conductor terminal. Wire
gauge must be no thinner than the current-carrying wire in the product's mains supply.
Resistance between the protective conductor terminal and earth must be no greater than
0.1 W. Use thicker gauge wire if the resistance is too high.
Providing a Protective Earth Connection for Motors
You must provide a connection from the APEX motor to a reliable earth system. This
connection provides a protective earth for the motor, and is in addition to the earth connection
provided by the earth wire in the motor's power cable. The motor's protective earth connection
is important for safety reasons, and must not be omitted.
Make connections according to the following instructions and diagram:
110
APEX615n Installation Guide
Servo Motor
Safety Earth
Cable
(green/yellow)
Providing Protective Earth Connection for Motor
1
2
3
Use a spade lug in combination with a star washer and mounting bolt to make good
contact with the bare metal surface of the motor's mounting flange.
Use a green and yellow striped wire to make the connection between the motor and earth.
Wire gauge must be no thinner than the current carrying wire in the motor's power cable.
Resistance between the motor and earth must be no greater than 0.1 W. Use thicker gauge
wire if the resistance is too high.
Mechanical
Installing in an Enclosure
The APEX615n Controller/Drive must be installed within an enclosure. The enclosure's
interior must not be accessible to the machine operator. The enclosure should be opened only
by skilled or trained service personnel.
Servicing the APEX Drive
Changing Firmware
Only skilled or trained personnel should change firmware.
Changing Batteries
The APEX615n Controller/Drive contains a replaceable lithium battery, of type Duracell
DL2450, or Sanyo CR2450, or equivalent. Only skilled or trained personnel should change
batteries.
Disposal of
Batteries
Dispose of batteries in accordance with local regulations.
Do Not Replace
Fuses
The APEX 615n Controller/Drive has no fuses designed to be replaced by the user. Fuse
failure indicates that other components have also failed. Fuses and other components should
only be replaced by Compumotor or its designated repair facilities.
Thermal Safety
The Motor May Be
Hot
The motor may reach high temperatures during normal operations, and may remain hot after
power is removed.
Appendix D
111
Table of Graphic Symbols and Warnings
The following symbols may appear in this user guide, and may be affixed to the products
discussed in this user guide.
Symbol
Description
Earth Terminal
Protective Conductor Terminal
Frame or ChassisTerminal
Equipotentiality
Caution, Risk of Electric Shock
Caution, Refer to Accompanying Text
Hot Surface
112
APEX615n Installation Guide
Appendix E
EMC Installation Guidelines
General Product Philosophy
Compumotor products that were not designed originally for EMC compliance, such as the
APEX615n, will require specific measures to be taken during installation. These measures
vary according to the type of product. The ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the EMC
requirements are met rests with the systems builder.
It is important to remember that for specific installations, the full protection requirements of
the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC need to be met before the system is put into service. This
must be verified either by inspection or by testing. The following EMC installation
instructions are intended to assist in ensuring that the requirements of the EMC directive are
met. It may be necessary to take additional measures in certain circumstances and at specific
locations.
It should be stressed that although these recommendations are based on expertise acquired
during tests carried out on each of the product types, it is impossible for Compumotor to
guarantee the compliance of any particular installation. This will be strongly influenced by
the physical and electrical details of the installation and the performance of other system
components. Nevertheless it is important to follow all the installation instructions if an
adequate level of compliance is to be achieved.
Safety Considerations
These products are intended for installation according to the appropriate safety procedures
including those laid down by the local supply authority regulations. The recommendations
provided are based on the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive and specifically on
EN60204. It should be remembered that safety must never be compromised for the purpose of
achieving EMC compliance. Therefore in the event of a conflict occurring between the safety
regulations and the following recommendations, the safety regulations always take
precedence.
General Considerations Applicable to all Products
External enclosures
The measures described in these recommendations are primarily for the purpose of controlling
conducted emissions. To control radiated emissions, all drive and control systems must be
installed in a steel equipment cabinet which will give adequate screening against radiated
emissions. This external enclosure is also required for safety reasons. There must be no user
access while the equipment is operating. This is usually achieved by fitting an isolator switch
to the door assembly.
Packaged products must be mounted to a conductive panel. If this has a paint finish, it will be
necessary to remove the paint in certain areas where specified.
To achieve adequate screening of radiated emissions, all panels of the enclosure must be bonded
to a central earth point. The enclosure may also contain other equipment and the EMC
requirements of these must be considered during installation. Always ensure that drives and
controllers are mounted in such a way that there is adequate ventilation.
AC supply filtering
These recommendations are based on the use of proprietary screen filter units which are readily
available. However the full EMC test includes a simulated lightning strike which will damage
the filter unless adequate surge suppression devices are fitted. These are not normally
incorporated into commercial filters since the lightning strike test can be destructive. This test
is normally carried out on the overall system and not on individual components, therefore the
surge protection should be provided at the system boundary.
Try to arrange the layout of drive and filter so that the AC input cable is kept away from the
filter output leads. It is preferable for the current path to be as linear as possible without
doubling back on itself - this can negate the effect of the filter. Mount the filter within 2
inches (50mm) of the drive or transformer, if required, and run the input cable and any earth
cables close to the panel.
The next section of this Appendix lists the recommended AC Input Power Filter for the
APEX615n.
Control signal connections
High-quality braided-screen cable should be used for control connections. In the case of
differential inputs, it is preferable to use cable with twisted pairs to minimize magnetic
coupling. This applies to both analog and digital signals. Control cables leaving the enclosure
should have the cable screen returned to a local ground point near the product. Where screened
leads are used in control circuits that are only opto-isolated at one end, the screen must be
referenced to earth at the non-isolated end. Where there is isolation at both ends of the
connection, earth the screen at the receiving end. This is to give protection against coupled
noise impulses and fast transient bursts.
Remember to route control signal connections well away (at least 8 inches) from relays and
contactors. Control wiring should not be laid parallel to power or motor cables and should
only cross the path of these cables at right angles. Bear in mind that control cables connected
to other equipment within the enclosure may interfere with the controller or drive, particularly
if they have come from outside the cabinet. Take particular care when connecting external
equipment with the cabinet door open, for instance a computer or terminal; static discharge
may cause damage to unprotected inputs.
Motor Cabling
In order to prevent electrical cross-talk, motor cables not incorporating a braided screen shield
must remain within earthed metal conduit the entire exposed length of travel. It is advised that
each high power motor cable utilize its own conduit.
114
APEX615n Installation Guide
Ferrite absorber specifications
The absorbers described in these installation recommendations are made from a low-grade
ferrite material which has high losses at radio frequencies. They therefore act like a high
impedance in this waveband.
The recommended components are produced by Parker Chomerics (617-935-04850) and are
suitable for use with cable having an outside diameter up to 10—13mm. The specification is
as follows:
Chomerics part number
Outside diameter
Inside diameter
Length
Impedance at 25MHz
Impedance at 100MHz
Curie temperature
83-10-M248-1000
17.5mm
10.7mm
28.5mm
80Ω
120Ω
130°C
83-10-A637-1000
28.5mm
13.77mm
28.57mm
135Ω
210Ω
130°C
(the device should not be operated near this temperature)
Handling and installing the ferrite absorbers
Take care when handling the absorbers - they can shatter if dropped on a hard surface. For this
reason the suggested method of installation is to use a short length of 19mm diameter heatshrink sleeving (See figure 1). This gives a degree of physical protection while the cable is
being installed. The sleeving should have a shrink ratio of at least 2.5:1. Cable ties may be
used as an alternative, however they give no physical protection to the absorber.
Ferrite absorber
retained by
heatshrink sleeving
Figure 1 - Ferrite Sleeve Installation
Appendix E
115
P-Clip Installation Details
The function of the P-Clip is to provide a 360 degree metallic contact and thus a convenient
means of ensuring a proper R.F. ground. When dealing with EMI issues, it is important to
remember that continuity, a DC connection, does not at all speak to the integrity of an AC
(high-frequency) connection. High-Frequency bonding typically involves wide, flat cabling to
establish a suitable system ground. When applied properly, the P-Clip has been shown to give
an adequate high-frequency contact.
When installing a P-Clip, Figure 2, install as close to the cable end as possible, provided a
suitable ground, backplane, earth stud or bus bar is accessible, (this may mean removing the
paint from a cabinet or panel). Remove only the outer (vinyl) jacket of the braided screen cable
(this allows the braid to continue to the cable connector), be careful not to damage the braid.
Snap the P-clip over the exposed braid, and adjust for a tight fit. Secure the clip to the
designated ground with a machine screw and lock washer. The use of brass or other inert
conductive metal P-Clip is recommended. Cover any exposed bare metal with petroleum jelly
to resist corrosion.
Remove outer jacket only
do not cut braid
P-Clip
Figure 2 - P-Clip Installation
APEX615n Servo Controller/Drive
Applicable Products:
APEX6151, APEX6152, APEX6154
Please read this in conjunction with the general considerations applicable to all products.
To insure proper grounding of the APEX615n Controller/Drive, remove paint from the rear
panel that is located behind the upper right mounting slot on the drive. The upper right slot is
unpainted. You can use a star washer with the mounting screw in this slot to provide a
grounding path from the chassis ground to the unpainted mounting surface. After mounting
the unit use petroleum jelly on the exposed metal to minimize the risk of future corrosion.
Filtering the AC mains supply
A filter must be installed between the incoming AC supply and the input to the drive.
Suitable filters are:
Controller/
Drive
Filter
Manufacturer
APEX6151
Schaffner
Schaffner
Corcom
Schaffner
Schaffner
Corcom
Schaffner
Schaffner
Corcom
APEX6152
APEX6154
* Test Pending
116
APEX615n Installation Guide
AC Control
Filter
120/240VAC
FN610-3-06
FN2070-3/06
3EB1
FN610-3-06
FN2070-3/06
3EB1
FN610-3-06
FN2070-3/06
3EB1
AC Mains
Filter
1-Phase
120/240VAC
FN2070-16-06
*
FN258-16-07
*
FN258-16-07
*
AC Mains
Filter
3-Phase
120/240VAC
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
Not Applicable
FN258-16-07
Not Applicable
20AYT6C
FN258-16-07
FN258-30-07
20AYT6C
Mount the filter within 2 inches (50mm) of the drive as shown in Figure 4. Ensure that there
is no paint on the mounting panel under the filter mounting lugs - it is vital that there is
large-area conductive contact between the filter and the panel.
Connect the incoming AC supply cable to the push-on or screw type terminals on the filter,
with the earth lead connected to a local earth stud, bus bar or metal back-plane. Route the
supply cable so that it runs close to the walls of the enclosure. Connect the earth terminal on
the filter case to earth.
Figure 3 shows the controller/drive system with two separate AC line filters. Another option
is to use the AC mains filter to power the AC control input.
Fit a ferrite absorber, Figure 1, over the cable before wiring the filter output terminals to the
AC input on the drive, see Figure 4. Locate the absorber as close as possible to the drive
using heat-shrink sleeving. Take the drive earth connection from the same stud that retains the
filter case earth.
Motor Connections
Standard
Compumotor
Motors
Compumotor servo motor systems ship with motors that do not incorporate the use of a
braided screen to control conducted emissions. Therefore when used in installations where the
motor cable is not within earthed conduit the entire length of travel, the standard motor cable
should not be used.
For motors with exposed cabling (not within earthed conduit), follow the guidelines below:
Removable cabling ......Remove the motor cable from the standard motor, and replace with a
suitable cable described below, see Motor Cables.
Permanent cabling .......Cut off cable in excess of approximately 4 inches (10 cm), and attach
a suitable cable described below, see Motor Cables.
Termination of the braid shield at the motor must be made using a 360° bond to the motor
body or mounting flange, and this may be achieved by using a suitable clamp. Many servo
motors are designed to accommodate MS style connections or an appropriate terminal gland
which can be used for this purpose, (in the case of MS style connectors, ensure that the cable
braid is in full contact with the metal MS connector body). If this is not the case, P-clip the
braid, see Figure 2, to the rear end bell of the motor housing, (on Compumotor Servo Motors
rather than securing the cable braid to the motor end bell, P-clip the braid to the conductive
motor mounting surface as shown in Figure 3). This will not only provide a good high
frequency bond, but strain relief as well.
At the drive end of the motor cable, fit a ferrite absorber over the cable before wiring to the
motor connector (it may be necessary to remove the existing connector). Locate the absorber
as close as possible to the connector using heat-shrink sleeving. Run the motor cable down to
the mounting panel, expose a short length of braiding and anchor to the panel with a P-clip.
The APEX615n Controller/Drive requires a safety earth connection to the motor (green and
yellow striped wire) - take this from the stud or bus bar. Run the safety earth lead alongside
the motor lead. Note that the motor cable should be kept away from I/O cables carrying
control signals.
Motor Cables
Braided Screen cable with at least 80% coverage should be used for after-market motor cables.
Consult the APEX User Guide for require cable gages and number of conductors.
There must be no break in the 360° coverage that the screen provides around the cable
conductors. If a connector must be used it should retain the 360° coverage, possibly by the use
of an additional metallic casing where it passes through the bulkhead of the enclosure. The
cable screen must not be connected to the cabinet at the point of entry. Its’ function is to
return high-frequency chopping current back to the drive or controller. This may require
mounting the connector on a sub-panel insulated from the main cabinet, or using a connector
having an internal screen which is insulated from the connector housing.
Appendix E
117
Within the cabinet itself, all the motor cables should lie in the same trunking as far as
possible. They must be kept separate from any low-level control signal cables. This applies
particularly where the control cables are unscreened and run close to the drive or other sources
of electrical noise.
Motor Feedback
Cables
Feedback devices such as encoders, tachometers, Hall effect sensors, and resolvers also require
the use of high-quality braided screen cable. If it is necessary to replace the standard feedback
cable, select a braided screen cable that matches the gage of the devices original cable and
attach as close to the transducer as possible. Avoid complex and bulky connections that can
cause degradation in feedback signal quality. If possible, use in-line cable splicing techniques,
and cover the splice point with heat-shrink tubing. Remove a section of the braided shield
cable’s insulation to expose the braid, and tie the braid to earth using the same P-clip 360°
bond as shown in Figure 2. Differential signals should use twisted pair cable to minimize
magnetic coupling. At the receiving end, fit a ferrite absorber over the feedback cable before
wiring the connector, then P-clip the braid to a suitable ground, (metal back-plane of drive
mounting panel, or earth point of device that receives the feedback), Figure 4.
Servo Motors
It is preferable to use motors with screw terminations whenever possible. If flying-lead motors
are used, it is important that the unscreened leads are converted into a braided-screen cable
within 4 inches (10cm) of the motor body. A separate terminal box may be used for this
purpose but the braided cable screen must be properly strapped to the motor body.
Motor and Resolver
Cables
Servo Motor
Figure 3: Servo Motor Detail - P-Clip, Safety Earth
118
APEX615n Installation Guide
Safety Earth
Cable
(green/yellow)
Single Phase
AC Input Cable
Three Phase
AC Input Cable
AC Control
Filter
AC Mains
Filter
Controller
Cable
Encoder
Cable
Remove
Paint behind
this area
Braidedscreen
cables
A
P
E
X
6
1
5
4
Rx
Tx
nd
oG
Is
V
+5
+
Rx
x
Rx R
+ Tx
Tx
Tx Shld
d
n
oG
Is
ield
Sh nd
G Z
Z+
BB+
AA+
V
+5
Iso
d
Gn
Iso me
Ho g
Ne
s
Po
I+
AN
IAN
-A
Trg
-B
Trg A
tOu d
n
G
Iso +5V
t-P
Ou
In-P
x-P
Au O
I/
V_
t
se
Offnce
la
Ba ut
tp
Ou tion
ch ra
Ta alib
C
le
ab
En ble
a
Dis ault
e F lt
dg au
Bri ve F ult
Dri r Fa e
to ag
Mo Volt it
er Lim
Ov I2t ault
nF e
ge tiv
Re n Ac
ge
Re
t
se
Re d
Gn
NC
In
le
ab t
En Ou
ult
Fa Gnd
NC
NC
t
Ou
ch
Ta Gnd
5V
+1
d
Gn
V
-15
A+
CH –
A
CH +
B
CH –
B
CH +
Z
CH –
Z
H
C d
Gn
ield
Sh d
Re
Blk
Grn
Blu
Brn
t
Wh
+
MT
MT
+
lay
Re –
Flt elay
R
C
lt
N
F
NC
Ferrite
absorber
Motor Safety
Earth
Motor
cable
Resolver
Cable
Figure 4 - APEX 615n AC, Motor, Drive Cables and Filters
Appendix E
119
Control Signal Wiring
High-quality braided screen cable should be used for control connections. In cases where the signal
transmission is in differential mode, it is preferable to use cable with twisted pairs to minimize
magnetic coupling. No connection is made to the cable screen at the drive itself. Fit a ferrite
absorber close to the I/O connector and run the cable down to the mounting panel as shown in
Fig. 5. Expose a short length of the braided screen and anchor to the panel with a P-clip.
The level at which the I/O operates means that the signals are unlikely to meet EMC
immunity requirements if taken outside the enclosure without proper screening.
Communications ........ In applications that require serial communications with the
APEX615n, special care must be taken in assuring proper wiring
practices are utilized. Good quality braided screen cable should be used
for the communication cabling. No connection is made to the cable
screen at the drive itself. Fit a ferrite absorber close to the
communications connector and run the cable down to the mounting
panel as shown in Figure 5. Expose a short length of the braided
screen and anchor to the panel with a P-clip. Avoid routing
communication cables near high power lines, and sources of high
energy impulses.
Braided-screen
cables
CommA
P
E
X
Encoder
Limits Cable
6
1
5
or
Err
ity md
loc e C
Ve rqu
in
To
Ga
ve
cti
lle
in
a
G
ral
teg
l In
ce
Ve
lan
a
tB
se
al
Off
C
t
tpu
Ou
ch
le
Ta
ab
En ble
a
Dis ault
e F lt
dg au
Bri ve F ult
Dri r Fa e
to ag
Mo Volt it
er Lim
Ov I2t ault
n F tive
e
g
Re n Ac
ge
Re
2
Co
t
se
Re d
Gn
ble
na
t E In
l In ble
Ve Ena Out
ult
Fa Gnd
d+
an
mm dCo man t
u
m
Co Outp d
h
c
Gn
Ta
5V
1
+
d
Gn
V
-15
A+
CH –
A
CH +
B
CH –
B
CH +
Z
CH –
Z
CH d
Gn
I/O Cable
Programmable
I/O Cable
ield
Sh d
Re
k
1 Blac
tor
en
Sta r 2 Gre
e
to
Blu
Sta r 3
n
to
Sta r 4 Brow
e
to
it
Sta r 1
Wh l
e
to
Ro r 2 p+ Y
to
m
rg
Ro r Te p- O
to
m
y+
Mo r Te Rela
to lt
y–
Mo Fau Rela
+
ck
ult
Fa dba –
k
e
Fe bac
ed
Fe
r
oto
um
mp
Co
VM50
Ribbon
Cable
Figure 5 - APEX 615n Controller Cables
120
APEX615n Installation Guide
Appendix F
Configuring DIP Switches
APEX6151 DIP Switches
L2
Earth
Earth
Earth
Earth
Control L2
Control L2
SW1 8 1 SW2 8 1 SW3 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1
A diagram showing DIP switch
functions shown on page 7.
OFF
1
OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Control L1
SW1 8 1 SW2 8 1 SW3 8
Control L1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Earth
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Earth
The default setting for all DIP switches
when the APEX6151 ships from the
factory is off. You must set these
switches to configure the drive for your
particular application. Use a small
screwdriver to set the switches. The next
section summarizes the function of each
switch.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D A N G E R
L1
L2
HIGH VOLTAGE
L1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D A N G E R
HIGH VOLTAGE
The APEX6151 has three 8-position DIP switches. The switches are located behind a small
metal cover on top of the APEX6151. Loosen the two screws that hold the access cover, and
move the cover to expose the DIP switches.
DIP Switch Location, with Cover Closed and Open
Switch 1 (SW 1)
REGEN FAULT — #1: Set this switch in the OFF position for normal operation of the
APEX6151’s internal regeneration circuit. For most applications, this switch should be OFF. If
you construct your own external regeneration circuit, set this switch ON to disable the
APEX6151’s regeneration fault. For more information, see the discussion of regeneration in
Chapter 5.
HALL SENSOR DEGREES — #2: Set this switch in the OFF position if you use a
motor with 120° Hall effect sensors. Set this switch in the ON position if you use a motor
with 60° Hall effect sensors.
RESERVED — #3: Set this switch in the OFF position.
MOTOR POLE PAIR NUMBER — #4 & #5: Set these two switches according to
the number of pole pairs your motor has. APEX and SM Series motors, which have two pole
pairs (four poles) require switches #4 & #5 to be OFF.
RESOLVER SPEED — #6: For a motor with a single speed resolver, turn #6 OFF.
(This switch should be OFF if you use an APEX or SM motor, all of which have single-speed
resolvers.) For a motor with a two-speed resolver, turn #6 ON.
CURRENT LOOP COMPENSATION — #7 & #8: These two switches control the
dynamics of the APEX6151's current feedback loop. Use these switches to match the drive's
performance to your particular motor's characteristics. For Compumotor APEX and SM
motors, set the switches according to the table below. If you use a motor from another vendor,
call Compumotor's Applications Department for instructions on setting these two DIP
switches for your motor. (see toll-free number on inside front cover)
APEX or SM MOTOR
SM233B
APEX602, SM231A, SM232A
APEX603
RESERVED
#7
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
#8
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Switch 2 (SW 2)
CONTINUOUS CURRENT — #1, #2, #3: If the APEX6151 goes into current
foldback, it reduces its output current down to the continuous current level set by these three
switches.
MOTOR
SM231A, SM232A
APEX603
SM233B, APEX602
SET CONTINUOUS CURRENT TO
3.4 amps
4.0 amps
6.0 amps
#1
OFF
OFF
ON
#2
ON
ON
OFF
#3
OFF
ON
ON
PEAK CURRENT — #4, #5, #6: These three switches set the peak current that the
APEX6151 will produce.
MOTOR
SM231A, SM232A
APEX603
APEX602, SM233B
SET PEAK CURRENT TO
9.5 amps
14 amps
16 amps
#4
OFF
ON
ON
#5
ON
OFF
ON
#6
OFF
ON
ON
TIME CONSTANT — #7 & #8: These two switches set the motor thermal time
constant, which the foldback circuit uses to estimate motor behavior. Consult your motor
specifications to determine your motor's thermal time constant. The following table shows
switch settings for time constants of 10, 20, 30, and 40 minutes. The table also shows the
switch settings to use for APEX and SM motors.
TIME CONSTANT
10 Minutes
20 Minutes
30 Minutes
40 Minutes
MOTOR
APEX602
APEX603
SM231A, SM232A
SM233B
#7
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
#8
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
The time constant is NOT the time until foldback occurs. It is a parameter based upon the
motor's physical characteristics, with the motor mounted to a suitable heatsink.
Three variables (continuous current, actual current, and time constant) affect the amount of
time that the foldback circuit allows operations to continue before foldback occurs. For a full
explanation of the foldback circuit, see Chapter ƒ Advanced Features. The following equation
gives an approximate time, in minutes, for a motor that operates from a cold start.
time(in minutes)
2 

 I

continuous   

= Time Constant  − ln 1 − 
 
  Iactual   


Icontinuous is the continuous current, which you selected when you set switches #1, #2, and
#3. Iactual is the actual peak current, whose maximum value you selected when you set
switches #4, #5, and #6.
122
APEX615n Installation Guide
Switch 3 (SW 3)
RESERVED — #1: Set this switch in the OFF position.
ALIGNMENT MODE — #2: Turn this switch OFF. If you need to align the resolver,
you will turn this switch ON during the alignment procedure, and turn it OFF when you have
finished aligning the resolver. This switch must be OFF during normal operating conditions.
See Chapter ƒ Advanced Features for more information.
COMMUTATION TEST MODE — #3: Turn this switch OFF. If you need to operate
the drive in commutation test mode during a troubleshooting procedure, you will turn this
switch ON during the procedure, and turn it OFF when you are finished. This switch must be
OFF during normal operating conditions. See Chapter ∆ Troubleshooting for more
information.
HALL SELECT — #4: Turn this switch OFF if your motor has a resolver. (This switch
should be OFF if you use an APEX or SM Series servo motor, all of which have resolvers.)
Turn this switch ON if your motor has Hall effect sensors instead of a resolver.
TACHOMETER SCALING — #5: This switch scales the tachometer output. If you use
a motor that has a single speed resolver, turn this switch OFF to scale the tachometer output
to equal 1 volt per 1,000 rpm. (This switch should be OFF if you use an APEX or SM
Series servo motor, all of which have single-speed resolvers.) If you use a motor that has a
two-speed resolver, turn this switch ON. This will adjust gains of the internal circuitry, so
that the tachometer output is scaled to equal 1 volt per 1,000 rpm for two speed resolvers.
RESERVED — #6, #7, #8: Set these three switches in the OFF position.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ControlL2
Off 1 SW1
8
1
SW2
8
1
SW3
8
Earth
ControlL1
L3
Earth
L2
L1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ControlL2
Off 1 SW1
8
1
SW2
8
1
SW3
8
Earth
ControlL1
L3
D A N G E R
HIGH
VOLTAGE
Earth
D A N G E R
HIGH
VOLTAGE
L2
L1
APEX6152/6154 DIP Switches
APEX6152/6154 DIP Switch Location, with Cover Closed and Open
Appendix F
123
Switch 1 (SW 1)
RESERVED — #1, #2, #3: Set these three switches in the OFF position.
MOTOR POLE PAIR NUMBER — #4, #5: Set these two switches according to the
number of pole pairs your motor has. All APEX motors have two pole pairs (four poles),
except the APEX635 and APEX640, which have three pole pairs (six poles).
RESOLVER SPEED — #6: For a motor with a single speed resolver, turn #6 OFF.
(This switch should be OFF if you use an APEX motor, all of which have single-speed
resolvers.) For a motor with a two-speed resolver, turn #6 ON.
CURRENT LOOP COMPENSATION — #7 & #8: These two switches control the
dynamics of the APEX615n's current feedback loop. Use these switches to match the drive's
performance to your particular motor's characteristics. Based on the motor's inductance, set the
switches according to the following table. The table also shows the switch setting for each
APEX motor.
MOTOR INDUCTANCE APEX MOTOR
#7
#8
25 mH to 40 mH
5 mH to 15 mH
15 mH to 25 mH
Reserved
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
605, 606
604, 610
620, 630, 635, 640
Switch 2 (SW 2)
CONTINUOUS CURRENT — #1, #2, #3: If the APEX615n goes into current
foldback, it reduces its output current down to the continuous current level set by these three
switches.
MOTOR
DRIVE
CONTINUOUS
CURRENT
#1
#2
#3
APEX604
APEX605,606
APEX610-640
APEX6152
APEX6152
APEX6154
9.0 amps
7.8amps
20 amps
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
PEAK CURRENT — #4, #5, #6: These three switches set the peak current that the
APEX615n will produce.
MOTOR
DRIVE
PEAK
CURRENT
#4
#5
#6
APEX604,605,606
APEX610-640
APEX6152
APEX6154
24 amps
40 amps
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
TIME CONSTANT — #7 & #8: These two switches set the motor thermal time
constant, which the foldback circuit uses to estimate motor behavior. Consult your motor
specifications to determine your motor's thermal time constant. The following table shows
switch settings for time constants of 10, 20, 30, and 40 minutes. The table also shows the
switch settings to use for APEX motors.
124
TIME CONSTANT
APEX MOTOR
#7
#8
10 Minutes
20 Minutes
30 Minutes
40 Minutes
604,605, 606
610
620, 630
635, 640
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
APEX615n Installation Guide
The time constant is NOT the time until foldback occurs. It is a parameter based upon the
motor's physical characteristics.
Three variables (continuous current, actual current, and time constant) affect the amount of
time that the foldback circuit allows operations to continue before foldback occurs. For a full
explanation of the foldback circuit, see Chapter ƒ Advanced Features. The following equation
gives an approximate time, in minutes, for a motor that operates from a cold start.
2

 I
  

time(in minutes) = Time Constant  − ln 1 −  continuous   
  Iactual   


Icontinuous is the continuous current, which you selected when you set switches #1, #2, and
#3. Iactual is the actual peak current, whose maximum value you selected when you set
switches #4, #5, and #6.
Switch 3 (SW 3)
RESERVED — #1: Set this switch in the OFF position.
ALIGNMENT MODE — #2: Turn this switch OFF. If you need to align the resolver,
you will turn this switch ON during the alignment procedure, and turn it OFF when you have
finished aligning the resolver. This switch must be OFF during normal operating conditions.
See Chapter ƒ Advanced Features for more information.
COMMUTATION TEST MODE — #3: Turn this switch OFF. If you need to operate
the drive in commutation test mode during a troubleshooting procedure, you will turn this
switch ON during the procedure, and turn it OFF when you are finished. This switch must be
OFF during normal operating conditions. See Chapter ∆ Troubleshooting for more
information.
HALL SELECT — #4: Turn this switch OFF if your motor has a resolver. (This switch
should be OFF if you use an APEX motor, all of which have resolvers.) Turn this switch ON
if your motor has Hall effect sensors instead of a resolver.
TACHOMETER SCALING — #5: This switch scales the tachometer output. If you use
a motor that has a single speed resolver, turn this switch OFF to scale the tachometer output
to equal 1 volt per 1,000 rpm. (This
switch should be OFF if you use an APEX motor, all of which have single-speed resolvers.) If
you use a motor that has a two-speed resolver, turn this switch ON. This will adjust gains of
the internal circuitry, so that the tachometer output is scaled to equal 1 volt per 1,000 rpm for
two speed resolvers.
RESERVED — #6, #7, #8: Set these three switches in the OFF position.
Appendix F
125
126
APEX615n Installation Guide
Appendix G
Regeneration
The APEX615n can dissipate regenerated energy in its internal regeneration resistor. If an
APEX615n system regenerates more energy than the internal resistor can dissipate, you can
connect an external resistor between two terminals labeled V Bus+ and Regen Resistor, located
on the motor connector. The external resistor will double the dissipation capabilities of the
APEX6151 and APEX6154. To increase the APEX6152's dissipation capabilities, you can
add a resistor network, as explained later in this appendix..
The APEX6151's regeneration circuit works automatically—there are no adjustments to make.
The circuit monitors the voltage on the power bus. If regenerated energy from the motor
causes the bus voltage to rise above a threshold value, the circuit closes a switch, thus
connecting the regeneration resistor between the positive and negative sides of the power bus,
V Bus+ and VBus–. The energy is then dissipated in the resistor. During the regeneration event,
the red LED labeled Regen Active, located on the APEX615n's front panel, will be illuminated.
The next drawing shows a schematic that includes the internal regeneration resistor, terminals
for
When Do You Need an External Regeneration Resistor?
The APEX6151’s regeneration control circuit was designed to automatically deal with
regenerated power from almost all applications. Occasionally, however, an application
situation arises in which regeneration will cause more power dissipation than the internal
resistor can safely tolerate. In this situation, you can connect an external regeneration resistor
to double the power that the system can dissipate.
To determine whether or not you need an external resistor, you can use one of two methods:
• Empirical Method
• Calculation Method
Empirical Method
The empirical method uses a trial procedure to determine whether excess regeneration will
cause a regen or overvoltage fault. Operate your system (or a prototype of your system) and
observe the results of regeneration. When your system decelerates, the Regen Active LED will
be illuminated whenever regeneration turns on the internal resistor.
If the system’s regeneration levels are too high, eventually either a regen fault or an
overvoltage fault will shut down the APEX6151. (Be sure to let your system run for a long
enough time to see if the regen fault will be triggered.) At this point, you have two options:
• Modify the system’s move profile
• Install an external regeneration resistor
By changing the move profile—less torque, slower velocities, or a longer time between
moves, for example—you may be able reduce the regeneration to a lower level, so that the
fault no longer occurs.
By installing an external resistor, you can double the regeneration circuit’s power dissipation
capabilities. With the resistor installed, the circuit’s specifications become:
Continuous Power
Dissipation Rating
Peak Power
Dissipation Rating
APEX6151
100 watts
2 KW
APEX6152
N/A
N/A
APEX6154
180 watts
12 KW
After you alter the move profile, or install the external resistor, run the system again to verify
that regeneration no longer causes a fault.
Calculation Methods
You can use the calculation method to predict peak power dissipation and average power
dissipation. If peak power is greater than one kilowatt, or average power is greater than 50W,
you should install an external regeneration resistor.
A NOTE ABOUT UNITS: We want a solution for power that is express in watts. To be
consistent, we will use SI (metric) units in the following equations. If you want to use other
units, apply conversion factors in the appropriate places.
Calculating Peak Power
A typical trapezoidal move profile is shown below.
Acceleration
Deceleration
Vmax
Velocity
(in rps)
t1
t1
Time
t2
Move Profile for Regeneration Calculations
Regeneration only occurs during the deceleration portion of the move. At any moment during
deceleration, the amount of power regeneration is equal to the shaft power:
Pshaft = ωT = 2πvT
where
T = torque, in newton meters ( Nm)
ω = shaft velocity, in radians per second
v = shaft velocity, in revolutions per second (rps)
128
APEX615n Installation Guide
Peak power regeneration occurs at the moment deceleration begins, when the velocity is
highest.
Pshaft ( peak ) = 2πvmax T
Not all of this peak power must be dissipated in the power resistor. Some of it will be
dissipated in the copper windings of the motor—these power losses are known as copper
losses.
2
Pcopper
 T
= I R = 32  R
 kT 
2
where
I = motor current, in amps ( A)
R = line – to – line motor resistance, in ohms (Ω)
kt = motor torque constant, in newton meters per amp rms ( Nm / A rms)
Power is also dissipated in the drive itself—these losses are known as drive losses. (Notice
that we use the absolute value of the torque.)
 T
Pdrive = 5 2  
 kT 
The peak power dissipated in the regeneration resistor, then, is equal to the peak shaft power,
less copper and drive losses.
P peak = Pshaft − Pcopper − Pdrive
Substituting the values from the previous equations, we obtain the equation for calculating
peak power:
2
P peak
 T
 T
= ( 2πvmax T ) − 3 2   R − 5 2  
k
 T
 kT 
Substitute values from your application into this equation.
• If Ppeak is less than the Peak Power Dissipation Rating, the internal resistor is adequate.
• If Ppeak is greater than the Peak Power Dissipation Rating, install an external resistor.
Calculating Average Power
Time plays a role in average power calculations. Total regenerated energy is equal to the area
of the triangle under the deceleration portion of the move profile. In the move profile shown
earlier, the time of deceleration is t1. Total energy, W, is therefore:
W regen = 1 2 ( height )( base ) = 1 2 ( 2πvmax T )t1
During the deceleration time, copper losses and drive losses will dissipate some of the
regenerated energy. To determine how much energy these losses will dissipate, each of these
losses must be multiplied by the time t1:
  T 2 
W copper =  3 2   R  t1
  kT  

 T 
W drive = 5 2    t1
 kT  

Appendix G
129
The total energy that must be dissipated in the regen resistor consists of the total regenerated
energy, less copper and drive losses:
Wtotal
2

 T
 T 
3
1
=  2 ( 2πvmax T ) − 2   R − 5 2    t1
 kT 
 kT  


To find the average power, we must consider how frequently energy is "dumped" into the
resistor. The period of the move profile is the time t2. Frequency and period are related by:
frequency = f =
1
t2
To find the average power dissipation in the resistor, we can multiply the equation for total
energy by the frequency, or, as shown below, we can divide by the period of the repetitive
move profile.
Finally, we obtain the equation for average power:
2

 T
 T  t
Paverage =  1 2 ( 2πvmax T ) − 3 2   R − 5 2    1
 kT 
 kT   t 2


Substitute values from your application into this equation.
• If Paverage is less than the Continuous Power Dissipation Rating, the internal resistor is
adequate.
• If Paverage is greater than the Continuous Power Dissipation Rating, install an external
resistor.
Installing an External Regeneration Resistor
If you install an external resistor, ensure that it is adequately mounted and cooled. The internal
resistor is cooled by the APEX615n’s fan. The external resistor should be maintained at the
same temperature, or cooler, as the internal resistor. Excessive heating of the external resistor
can cause component failure.
CAUTION
Adequately cool the external resistor. Forced air cooling may be required. Maintain resistor
temperature at same or lower temperature as internal resistor.
Specifications for the internal resistor are as follows:
APEX6151:
• Resistor Size and Type
• Manufacturer Name:
• Manufacturer Part Number:
• Compumotor Part Name
130
APEX615n Installation Guide
150 ohm, 95 watt, 5% non-inductive resistor:
Dale
NHL-95-16N 150 OHM
5%, 3/16 QUICK CONNECT
APEX10 REGEN KIT
APEX6152: (for reference only: do not install external resistor)
• Resistor Size and Type
• Manufacturer Name:
• Manufacturer Part Number:
50 ohm, 100 watt, 5% non-inductive resistor:
Memcor-Truohm Inc.
FRV01006-2500-QM-NI
("NI " - Non Inductive)
Memcor-Truohm Inc.
Part Number 1141-006-001
• Mounting Bracket:
APEX6154:
• Resistor Size and Type
• Manufacturer Name:
• Manufacturer Part Number:
25 ohm, 100 watt, 5% non-inductive resistor:
Memcor-Truohm Inc.
FRV01006-2250-QM-NI
("NI " - Non Inductive)
Memcor-Truohm Inc.
Part Number 1141-006-001
APEX40 REGEN KIT
• Mounting Bracket:
• Compumotor Part Name
Use these, or an equivalently rated resistors, for your external resistor. Be sure to specify a
non-inductive resistor.
To connect the external resistor, wire its two terminals to V BUS+ and Regen Resistor, located
on the motor connector. Do not install more than one external resistor. The regeneration
control circuit will automatically dissipate half of the excess regenerated power in the external
resistor (provided that it is the the value indicated above).
CAUTION
Do not install more than one external regeneration resistor with the APEX6151 or APEX6154.
Do not install an external regeneration resistor with the APEX 6152.
Building Your Own Regeneration Circuit
If you need more continuous power dissipation than the internal and external resistors provide
for the APEX6151 and APEX6154, or the internal resistor provides for the APEX6152, you
can design and build your own network of external regeneration resistors.
The next table shows specifications for maximum continuous and peak dissipation that the
APEX615n can sustain. It also shows the minimum resistance for an external network. Do
not use a resistor network with less resistance than the values in this table.
Continuous
Power
Dissipation
Peak Power
Dissipation
Resistance
(min.)
APEX6151
286 W
2080 W
75 ohms
APEX6152
1560 W
3112 W
50 ohms
APEX6154
5760 W
12480 W
12.5 ohms
Appendix G
131
The APEX615n controller/drive's internal IGBT power switch is the component that
determines the above specifications. With the standard external resistors discussed previously,
the switch is already at its peak power dissipation level. However, the switch can dissipate
more continuous power than the standard resistors allow. Your network, therefore, can
dissipate additional continuous power, but must not dissipate more peak power. This is
shown in the table above.
To use an external network, you must take the following two steps.
1. Set DIP Switch 1, position #1, in the ON position. This disables the APEX615n's
Regen Fault circuit.
2. Disconnect the internal regeneration resistor.
Step 2 above requires opening the APEX615n's cover. Please call Compumotor’s Application
Engineering Department (see the inside front cover of this Installation Guide for the toll free
number) for instructions on opening the cover and disconnecting the resistor, and to obtain
information about designing your external resistor network.
Sharing the High Voltage Power Bus, using V Bus+ and V Bus–
In some applications with multiple APEX615n units, one or more may continuously receive
regenerated power from their loads. For example, in a tensioning application, two APEX615n
units apply tension (opposite torques) to a single moving load. In this situation, one
APEX615n could receive substantial regenerated power from its motor.
In such applications, you can connect the power buses from the APEX615n in parallel,
through the V BUS+ and V BUS– terminals, located on the motor connector. With the buses
connected in parallel, the regenerated power from one APEX615n is dissipated by the power
consumption of the other. Otherwise, all of the regenerated power would be continuously
dumped into the APEX615n’s own internal resistor.
132
APEX615n Installation Guide
I N D E X
A
AC input power connections & specs
21
AC power
jumpers 22
wiring options 23
acceleration
acceleration feedforward control
(SGAF) 83
acceleration range 4
accuracy
velocity 4
actual position 77
address
DIP switch selection 6
air-flow space, minimum 11
airborne contaminants 11
airflow 14
alignment mode 72, 123, 125
analog ground 18, 19
ANI input
feedback source 75
position 77
APEX Series Motors
APEX602 Motor Specifications 101
APEX603 Motor Specifications 102
APEX604 Motor Specifications 103
APEX605 Motor Specifications 104
APEX606 Motor Specifications 105
APEX610 Motor Specifications 106
APEX620 Motor Specifications 107
APEX630 Motor Specifications 108
APEX635 Motor Specifications 109
APEX640 Motor Specifications 110
motor brake characteristics 97
repeatability 97
resolver accuracy 97
speed/torque curves 97
APEX6151
connector locations 16
dimensions 12
internal connections 21
APEX6152
connector locations 17
dimensions 13
internal connections 22
APEX6154
connector locations 17
dimensions 13
internal connections 22
APEX615n
panel layout 14
B
balance—offset adjustments 71
baud rate 5
BCD input via thumbwheels 34
bias resistors
calculating 25
DIP switch selection 10
brakes 44, 97
brownout fault 62
C
cables
I/O, extending 35
RS-232C 67
calculating bias & termination resistors
25
chattering servo response 78
circuit drawings (see back cover of
manual, and “schematics, internal”)
closed-loop operation 75
COM 2 port function 10
command, servo output 75
commanded position 77
communication
Motion Architect 60
serial (see serial communication)
terminal emulation 49
troubleshooting 67
commutation test mode 73, 123, 125
CompuCAM™ 60
conduit 3, 35
configuration
bias resistor selection 10
COM 2 port function 10
DIP switches 125
motor current 6
RS-485 setup 10
serial communication on COM 2 10
termination resistor selection 10
connections
computer 25, 49
daisy-chain 25
encoder 26
end-of-travel limit inputs 27
home limit inputs 27
lengthening cables 35
motor cable 47
multi-drop 25
PLC inputs 33
PLC outputs 32
power (VAC) input 21
programmable inputs 32
programmable outputs 33
RP240 34
RS-232C 25
RS-485 25
terminal 25, 49
testing 48
thumbwheels 34
trigger inputs 28
VM50 screw terminal adaptor 31
connectors
drive auxiliary 36
encoder output 39
resolver 42
contaminants 11
continuous current 122, 124
control signal 75
controller output saturation 76
cooling 14
cooling the motor 58
coupling the motor to the load 58
critically damped servo response 78
current foldback 63
current foldback circuit 70
current loop compensation 126, 128
current settings 122, 124
current, motor
selecting 6
cycle power-definition 64
D
daisy-chain connections 25
damping 78
DC common 95
DC ground wire 94
DDE6000™ 60
debug tools 64
defeating noise 96
diagnostic LEDs 62
dimensions
APEX6151 12
APEX6152 13
APEX6154 13
APEX615n 11
motor 51
DIP switch
function 125
location 6, 121, 123
DIP switch locations 6
DIP switch settings
bias & termination resistors 10
motor current 6
DIP switches
APEX6151 7
APEX6152 8
APEX6154 9
disassembling the APEX615n 10
dissipation
heat 14
disturbance 78
rejection of 81
DRESET command 64
drive
resetting 62, 64
drive auxiliary connector 36
drive specifications 4
DRPCHK command 34
E
earth ground 18, 19, 95
electrical noise 3, 64
suppressing 35
enable input 65
connections & specs 37
enclosures
electrical 11
encoder
connections 26
test 50
feedback source 75
position 77
quadrature outputs 40
specifications 26
Z channel 40
encoder inputs 5
encoder output connector 39
end-of-travel limits
connections 27
environmental specifications 4
extending cables
I/O 35
F
factory configuration 6
fan 14
fault conditions & fault recovery 64
fault output
connections & specs 37
fault relay 44
fault relay terminals 44
feedback data 75
foldback, current 63, 70
LED 62
front panel LEDs 62
Fuses 4, 24
G
gains
definition 75
tuning 84
134
615n Installation Guide
ground
ANA GND 18, 19
Chassis Ground 18, 19
connection diagram 19
floating 18
I/O GND 18, 19
Iso GND 18, 19
Motor Ground 18, 19
Motor Ground 20
mounting slot 18, 19
Shield 18, 19, 20
ground connections 18
ground loops 95
grounding 3
mounting 12
procedure 18
H
Hall effect
DIP switch select 127, 129
hall effect input 39, 41
hall effect mode
resolver jumpers 41
hard limits (end-of-travel) (see end-oftravel limits)
heat 4
heat dissipation 14
home inputs 5
home limit input
connections & specs 27
humidity 4, 11
I
I/O cabling 35
I/O GND 18, 19
I2T limit 62, 63, 70
inductance, motor 126, 128
inductive load, connecting outputs to
33
input power
frequency range 4
input power
current 4
voltage range 4
inputs
enable 65
encoder 5, 26
end-of-travel limits 27
general-purpose programmable 31
home 5
home limit 27
limits 5
power (AC) 21
programmable 5
problems 66
test 50
serial communication (see serial
communication)
suppressing noise 35
trigger 28
triggers 5
instability 78
installation
connections (see connections)
DIP switch settings (see DIP switch
settings)
mounting (see mounting)
precautions 3
process overview 3
test 48
integral feedback control (SGI) 81
integral windup limit (SGILIM) 82
internal fan 14
Iso GND 18
J-K
jumper settings 10
jumpers
AC power connector 22
resolver connector 41
L
latched-definition 64
LEDs
front panel LEDs 62
light emitting diodes (LEDs) 62
limit input connections 27
limits inputs 5
load, coupling 58
M
mechanical brake 45
microelectronic components 96
minimum air-flow space 11
Motion Architect 60
Motion Builder™ 60
Motion Toolbox™ 60
motion trajectory update 85
motion trajectory update period 4
motor
cooling 58
coupling 58
current selection 6
dimensions 51
modifying 51
mounting 51
motor brakes 44, 97
motor cables 47
motor connections 47
motor fault 62
motor ground 18, 19, 20, 47
motor inductance 122, 126
motor specifications
APEX602 101
APEX603 102
APEX604 103
APEX605 104
APEX606 105
APEX610 106
APEX620 107
APEX630 108
APEX635 109
APEX640 110
motor temperature 43
motor temperature sensor input 43
motor thermal time constant 126, 128
mounting 12
APEX615n chassis 11
motor 51
move completion criteria 91
multi-drop
connections 25
internal configuration 10
N
National Electric Code Handbook i
negative-travel limits 27
noise
defeating 96
electrical 11
externally conducted 94
ground loops 95
internal switching 94
power line 93
sensitivity 35
transmitted 95
noise, electrical 3, 64
suppression 93
suppression on I/O cables 35
O
offset balance adjustments 71
open loop commutation 73
opening the APEX615n 10
oscillatory servo response 78, 82
ouput power
frequency range 4
ouput power
current 4
voltage range 4
output saturation 76
outputs
+5V 5
general-purpose programmable 31
OUT-A 31
programmable 5
problems 66
test 50
over-damped servo response 78
overcurrent fault 62
overshoot 78, 82
overtemperature fault 62
overvoltage fault 62, 69
P
panel layout 14
peak current 7-9,122, 126
performance specifications 4
pin outs
encoder connector 26
limits connector 27
programmable inputs 31
programmable outputs 31
PIV&F gains 80
PLC connections 32
polarity
end-of-travel limit inputs 27
home input 27
programmable inputs 31
programmable outputs 31
trigger inputs 28
pole pair number 121, 124
PORT command 34
COM 2 function 10
position
actual (based on feedback device)
77
commanded 77
error 65, 77
overshoot 82
response (servo) 77
types 78
setpoint 77
tracking error 77
position range 4
positive-travel limits 27
power
wiring options 23
power connector
jumpers 22
power line noise 93
power supply
AC input connections & specs 21
for limit inputs, & trigger inputs 28
for P-CUT, limit inputs, & trigger
inputs 27
for programmable inputs & outputs
31
power-up
start-up program (startp)
problems 66
pre-installation changes 6
precautions
installation 3
mounting 11
process of installation 3
product return procedure 73
programmable I/O
connections & specs 31
programmable inputs 5
programming
debug tools 64
error messages 64
programming tools available 60
proportional feedback control (SGP) 80
pseudo-quadrature outputs 40
Q
quadrature outputs 40
R
regen fault 62, 68
regen resistor
external 130-132
regeneration 48
removing the APEX615n frontplate 10
reset
drive 64
RESET command 64
reset input 64
connections & specs 36
resistor
regeneration 48
resistor braking 46
resistors, termination/bias
calculating 25
selecting 10
resolver
accuracy 97
alignment 72
resolution 4
speed 125, 128
resolver connector 42
fault relay terminals 43
response – servo 78
return procedure 73
rise time 78
RP240
connections
test 50
RP240, connections 34
RS-232C (see serial communication)
RS-232C communication 95
disable handshaking 67
troubleshooting 67
RS-485 (see serial communication)
S
safety 3
safety stops (see end-of-travel limits)
saturation of the control output 75
schematics, internal
enable input 37
encoder inputs 26
fault output 37
fault relay terminals.i.resolver
connector
fault relay terminals 44
hall effect input 41
limit inputs 27
motor temperature sensor input 43
programmable inputs and outputs
31
reset input 36
resolver rotors & stators 42
tachometer output 38
trigger inputs 28
±15V output 38
serial communication
RS-232C
configuration 10
connections 25
daisy-chain connections 25
specifications 5
RS-485
configuration 10
connections 25
multi-drop connections 25
resistor calculation 25
RP240 connections 34
specifications 5
servo
control methods/types 80
sampling frequency 75, 85
tuning, see tuning
servo sampling update period 4
setpoint 77
settling time 78
shield 20
shielding 3
I/O cables 35
ship kit 2
short circuit fault 62
single speed resolver 125, 128
sinking input device, connecting to 33
sinking output device, connecting to
28, 32
sourcing input device, connecting to
33
sourcing output device, connecting to
28, 32
Index
135
specifications
overall list of 4, 5
speed/torque curves 97
stability 78
status commands (see also back
cover, and test on page 20)
axis (see TASF command)
limit switches (see TLIM command)
motor faults (see TASXF command)
programmable inputs (see TIN
command)
programmable outputs (see TOUT
command)
trigger inputs (see TIN command)
steady-state 79
position error 77
support software available 60
surge suppression 93, 96
switching voltage levels 5
Switching voltage levels for HOM,
POS, NEG, TRG-A , TRG-B are
based on V_I/O input voltage level 5
system update period 4
system update rate 85
T
tachometer output
connections & specs 38
tachometer output calibration 72
tachometer scaling 123, 125
target zone 91
136
615n Installation Guide
timeout error 91
temperature range 4, 11
temperature sensors 11
terminal emulation, set up 49
termination resistors
calculating 25
DIP switch selection 10
test
system installation 48
thermal time constant 122, 124
thumbwheel connections 34
timeout error 91
torque/speed curves 97
transient 79
transmitted noise 95
travel limits 27
trigger inputs
connections 28
triggers 5
troubleshooting 62
common problems & solutions 65
diagnostic LEDs 64
error messages 64
RS-232C 67
tuning 75
APEX615n tuning procedure 84
gains, definition 80
PIV&F algorithm 80
process flow diagram 86
related 6000 series commands 79
scenario (case example) 89
target zone mode 91
two-speed resolver 121, 124
U
under-damped servo response 78
undervoltage fault 62
unstable 78
V
V Bus+ and V Bus– 132
VBUS+ 48
velocity
velocity feedback control (SGV) 82
velocity feedforward control (SGVF)
83
velocity accuracy 4
velocity range 4
velocity repeatability 4
VM50 adaptor 31
V_I/O 27, 28
W-Z
weight 5
windup of the integral action 82
wiring options
AC power 23
Z channel output 26
±15V output
connections & specs 38
APEX6151 Servo Controller/Drive Quick Reference
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
D A N G E R
HIGH VOLTAGE
L2
Earth
Earth
Earth
Control L1
1
• PROBLEM REPORT: TAS command reports problems. TFS command reports Following status.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW 1
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
SW 2
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
SW 3
8
APEX602
1
OFF
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW 2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SW 3
8
APEX603
1
OFF
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW 2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SW 3
8
SM231A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
• EXAMINE LEDs for indication of problem. pg 60
OFF
85–252 VAC;
47–66 Hz; 1-phase;
L1/L2 for high-power
amplifier,
Control L1/Control L2
for control logic.
see pg 22-24
DIP Switch Settings
1
for APEX & SM Series
Motors. see pages 6-9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
SW1 8 1 SW2 8 1 SW3 8
Control L2
OFF
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW 2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SW 3
8
SM232A
OFF
• INPUTS or OUTPUTS not working:
Programmable input (INFNC) functions and drive
fault detection will not operate until you enable
input functions with the INFEN1 command.
Programmable output (OUTFNC) functions will not
operate unless enabled with OUTFEN1 command.
AC INPUT
L1
L2
Earth
Earth
Earth
Control L1
Control L2
L1
• TO ALLOW MOTION:
– Power must be on. (Is at least one LED on?)
– ENABLE IN must be grounded.
– Connect (or disable) limits. LH (LHØ) command.
– Set (or disable) position error. SMPER (SMPERØ)
– Set reasonable gains for system. (see Tuning)
– Check encoder (TPE); increments for CW move?
– Check A, V, D. (If D = Ø, no motion will occur.)
1
DIP Switches and
AC Input Connector
top of drive
OFF
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW 2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SW 3
8
SM233B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
APEX6151
COM 1
Compumotor
COM 2
Connections – see pages 25 & 32
Configuring for RS-485 – see page 10
EXTERNAL ENCODER INPUT
Iso Gnd
RX+ +5V
Iso
Rx- Gnd
Tx+
Rx
Tx-
Tx
Iso Gnd Shld
External Encoder Input
Optically isolated. Encoder must be: Incremental; 2-ph. quadrature;differential (recommended) or single-ended; HCMOS compatible*; Max. freq.=1.2MHz; Min. between
transitions = 833 ns. see page 26
LIMITS
Home, Pos, Neg: V_I/O sets switching voltage levels; internal 6.8 KΩ pull-ups through
AUX-P to 5V or ext. 0–24V supp. see pg 27
Shield
Iso Gnd
ZZ+
BB+
LEDs
Offset
Balance
Name
Tach Output
Calibration
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Bridge Fault
Drive Fault
Motor Fault
Over Voltage
I2T Limit
Regen Fault
Regen Active
Bridge Fault
Drive Fault
Motor Fault
AA+
Reset
+5V
Over Voltage
I2T Limit
Gnd
AUXILIARY
Description
Analog Input. Not applicable.
Iso Gnd
NC
Home
Enable In
Neg
Fault Out
Pos
Gnd
Limits
Name
ANI+
ANI–
TEST POINT
1 volt = 2 amps commanded torque
see page 69
Tx
Regen Fault
Regen Active
NC
ANI+
TRG-A
Input #17. Optically isolated. Internal 6.8 KΩ pull-ups through
AUX-P to 5V or external 0–24V.
see pg 28. Use for position
capture input (INFNC).
TRG-B General purpose input #18.
Otherwise same as Trg-A.
OUT-A Output #9. Use for output on
position (OUTFNC). Circuit identical to prog. outputs. pg 28 , 29
Iso GND Isolated ground. see pg 18,19
+5V Connect to OUT-P, IN-P, and/or
AUX-P to power I/O. 100mA
limit. see pg 27, 28, 30, 31
OUT-P Pull-up resistors for prog.outputs
and OUT-A. pg 29, 31
IN-P Pull-up resistors for programmable inputs. pg 29, 31
AUX-P Pull-up resistors for Home, Neg,
Pos, Trg-A/B. pg 27, 28, 30
Connect V_I/O, Out-P, In-P, Aux-P to +5V for
HCMOS compatability.* Connect to 0 – 24V
supply for other compatibility. pg 5, 6, 27-31
ANI -
Auxiliary
RESET
GND
1
2
Encoder Output
Out-P
V_I/O
CHA+
CHA CHB+
CHB -
ENABLE IN
Active Low, ≤1.0V pg 35, 63
Active HIGH (floats if faulted)
(Output is held low if no fault)
page 35
TACH OUT
1V/1000 rpm for 1-speed resolver. Scale by DIP SW3-#5
page 36, 70
CHZ -
Shield
Cos
Sin
Ref
Red
±15V
Blk
Grn
Counts/Rev:
CW Rotation:
Ch Z:
MT+
Flt Relay+
RESOLVER CONNECTOR
NC
Resolver:
50
MOTOR CONNECTOR
Color Code:
APEX & SM
Resolver
Cables
Motor Cable
Color Codes
Phase C
Phase B
Phase A
V Bus Regen Resistor
V Bus+
*HCMOS-compatibility: Low ≤ 1.0V, High ≥ 3.25V
**Optical isolation between I/O GND and internal
microprocessor ground, but not between inputs and outputs.
Shield
Motor Ground
Phase C
Phase B
Phase A
V Bus Regen Resistor
V Bus+
Resolution is 4096 counts/rev
Function
Shield
Stator 3
Stator 1
Stator 2
Stator 4
Rotor 1
Rotor 2
Motor Temp+
Motor Temp–
Ref
(Underneath unit)
See pages 45
Shield
1024 counts, pre-quadrature
4096 counts, post-quadrature
Ch A leads Ch B
Ch Z pulse width is 90°
pg 37, 38
Flt Relay NC
Motor Ground
15 mA at ±15V page 36
ENCODER OUTPUT
Blu
Brn
Wht
MT -
49
D A N G E R
Internally isolated from EARTH
terminal. see pages 18,19
FAULT OUT
CHZ+
Gnd
HIGH VOLTAGE
Active Low, ≤1.0V pg 34, 62
-15V
+5V
I/O Number
Input #16
Input #15
Input #14
Input #13
Input #12
Input #11
Input #10
Input #9
Output #8
Output #7
Output #6
Output #5
See I/O Device Interface – pages 29-31
Gnd
Iso Gnd
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
Pin I/O Number
25 Input #8
27 Input #7
29 Input #6
31 Input #5
33 Output #4
35 Output #3
37 Output #2
39 Output #1
41 Input #4
43 Input #3
45 Input #2
47 Input #1
49 +5VDC
Even numbered pins connect to ISO GND.
I/O are optically isolated**; HCMOS compatible.* Plug is compatible with OPTO-22.
INPUTS: Connect internal 6.8KΩ pull-ups
through In-P to +5V or 0–24V supply.
OUTPUTS: Open-collector outputs. Connect internal 4.7KΩ pull-ups through Out-P
to +5V or 0 – 24V supply.
DRIVE AUXILIARY CONNECTOR
+15V
Out-A
In-P
Power stage overtemp.
Power stage overcurrent.
Motor short circuit.
Control board overtemp.
Undervoltage (brownout).
Resolver not connected.
Motor overtemperature.
Motor thermostat not
connected.
Bus voltage exceeded 420VDC.
I2t Limit exceeded. Drive is in
foldback. Output limited to
continuous current setting.
Drive faulted–excessive regen.
Regeneration resistor on, and
dissipating excess power.
Gnd
Trg-B
Aux-P
Indicates drive is enabled.
Indicates drive is disabled.
Tach Out
Trg-A
PROGRAMMABLE I / O
Pin
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
NC-
Description/Problem pg 60
Cos
COM 2
Torque Cmd
Test Point
Rx
Sin
COM 1
Set-up: 9600 baud, 8 data bits,1 stop bit,
no parity, full duplex. pages 25
APEX
SM
Green
Gray
Blue
Orange
Green/Yellow
Black/Yellow
White/Yellow
Red/Yellow
MT±
Flt Relay±
See Reverse for APEX6152 & APEX6154 Quick Reference
APEX
-----Red
Black
Green
Blue
Brown
White
Yellow
Orange
SM
-----Red
Black
Green
Blue
Brown
White
Yellow
Yellow
Short MT+ to MT– if the motor
has no temperature sensor
pg 41
Relay type: Normally Open
Max Current: 5A at 24VDC or
5A at 120VAC
see page 42 for more info
see Motor Braking on pg 42-44
APEX6152 &APEX6154 Servo Controller/Drive Quick Reference
8
2
3
4
5
6
15
A
PE
X6
SW 1
1
APEX605
APEX606
1
2
3
4
5
6
APEX610
54
for APEX Series Motors
see page 7-9
OFF
1
2
3
4
5
6
APEX620
APEX630
1
2
3
1
4
5
6
COM 1
COM 2
2
3
4
5
6
COM 2
Tx
Torque Cmd
Test Point
Rx
Tx
External Encoder Input
LIMITS
Shield
Enable
Iso Gnd
Disable
Z-
Bridge Fault
B-
AUXILIARY
Drive Fault
Drive Fault
Motor Fault
Over Voltage
B+
I 2 T Limit
A-
Regen Fault
A+
Regen Active
Limits
Iso Gnd
Description
Analog Input. Not applicable.
Motor Fault
Input #17. Optically isolated. Internal 6.8 KΩ pull-ups through
AUX-P to 5V or external 0–24V.
see pg 28. Use for position
capture input (INFNC).
TRG-B General purpose input #18.
Otherwise same as Trg-A.
OUT-A Output #9. Use for output on
position (OUTFNC). Circuit identical to prog. outputs. pg 28, 29
ISO GND Isolated ground. see pg 18, 19
+5V Connect to OUT-P, IN-P, and/or
AUX-P to power I/O. 100mA
limit. see pg 27, 28, 30, 31
OUT-P Pull-up resistors for prog. outputs
and OUT-A. pg 29,31
IN-P Pull-up resistors for programmable inputs. pg 29, 31
AUX-P Pull-up resistors for Home, Neg,
Pos, Trg-A, Trg-B pg 27, 28, 30
Connect V_I/O, Out-P, In-P, Aux-P to +5V for
HCMOS compatability.* Connect to 0 – 24V
supply for other compatibility. pg 5, 6, 27-31
Auxiliary
TRG-A
ANI+
Fault Out
ANI–
Gnd
Trg-A
NC
Trg-B
NC
Out-A
Tach Out
Iso Gnd
Gnd
+5V
+15 V
Out-P
Gnd
In-P
-15 V
V_I/O
Regen Fault
Regen Active
1
5
6
7
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW 2
SW 3
8
2
3
4
5
8
6
7
SW 3
8
8
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW 2
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW 3
8
8
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW 2
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
SW 3
2
3
4
5
8
8
6
7
8
RESET
CHA -
ENABLE IN
Active Low, ≤1.0V page 35, 63
FAULT OUT
Active HIGH (floats if faulted)
(Output is held low if no fault)
page 35
TACH OUT
1V/1000 rpm for 1-speed resolver. Scale by DIP SW3-#5
page 36, 70
CHB CHZ+
CHZ -
Cos
Active Low, ≤1.0V pg 34, 62
Internally isolated from EARTH
terminal. see page 18, 19
CHB+
±15V
Shield
Sin
Power stage overtemp.
Power stage overcurrent.
Motor short circuit.
Control board overtemp.
Undervoltage (brownout).
Resolver not connected.
Motor overtemperature.
Motor thermostat not
connected.
Bus voltage exceeded 420VDC.
I2t Limit exceeded. Drive is in
foldback. Output limited to
continuous current setting.
Drive faulted–excess regen.
Regen resistor on, and
dissipating excess power.
GND
Gnd
Ref
Indicates drive is enabled.
Indicates drive is disabled.
DRIVE AUXILIARY CONNECTOR
CHA+
Encoder Output
2
Programmable Inputs/Outputs
1
10 mA at ±15V page 36
Red
ENCODER OUTPUT
Blk
Counts/Rev:
Grn
Blu
CW Rotation:
Ch Z:
Brn
Wht
Yel
1024 counts, pre-quadrature
4096 counts, post-quadrature
Ch A leads Ch B
Ch Z pulse width is 90°
pg 37, 38
Org
I/O Number
Input #16
Input #15
Input #14
Input #13
Input #12
Input #11
Input #10
Input #9
Output #8
Output #7
Output #6
Output #5
Flt Relay+
49 50
RESOLVER CONNECTOR
Flt Relay NC
Resolver:
Resolution is 4096 counts/rev
Color Code:
APEX
Resolver
Cable
Connector Wire Color
Shield
Stator 3
Stator 1
Stator 2
Stator 4
Rotor 1
Rotor 2
Motor Temp+
Motor Temp–
Ref
Sin
NC
MOTOR CONNECTOR
D A N G E R
HIGH VOLTAGE
Shield
Motor Ground
Phase C
Phase B
Phase A
V Bus –
Regen Resistor
(Underneath unit)
page 45
See I/O Device Interface – pages 29-31
*HCMOS-compatibility: Low ≤ 1.0V, High ≥ 3.25V
**Optical isolation between I/O GND and internal
microprocessor ground, but not between inputs and outputs.
NC
Enable In
Aux-P
V Bus +
Pin I/O Number
25 Input #8
27 Input #7
29 Input #6
31 Input #5
33 Output #4
35 Output #3
37 Output #2
39 Output #1
41 Input #4
43 Input #3
45 Input #2
47 Input #1
49 +5VDC
Even numbered pins connect to ISO GND.
I/O are; optically isolated; HCMOS compatible.* Plug is compatible with OPTO-22.
INPUTS: Connect internal 6.8KΩ pull-ups
through In-P to +5V or 0 – 24V supply.
OUTPUTS: Open-collector outputs. Connect internal 4.7KΩ pull-ups through Out-P
to +5V or 0 – 24V supply.
Gnd
Neg
PROGRAMMABLE I / O
Pin
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
21
23
Over Voltage
I2T Limit
Reset
Home
Pos
8
4
SW 2
Description/Problem pg 60
+5V
Name
ANI+
ANI–
1
3
8
Name
Bridge Fault
Home, Pos, Neg: V_I/O sets switching voltage levels; internal 6.8 KΩ pull-ups through
AUX-P to 5V or ext. 0–24V supp. see pg 27
8
2
SW 3
1 volt = 3 amps cmd. torque
1 volt = 5 amps cmd. torque
see page 69
Enable
Disable
Tach Output
Calibration
Z+
1
1
LEDs
Offset
Balance
Iso Gnd Shld
EXTERNAL ENCODER INPUT
Optically isolated. Encoder must be: Incremental; 2-ph. quadrature;differential (recommended) or single-ended; HCMOS compatible*; Max. freq.=1.2MHz; Min. between
transitions = 833 ns. see page 26
1
8
APEX6152
APEX6154
Rx+ +5V
Iso
Rx- Gnd
Tx-
8
8
SW 2
TEST POINT
Rx
Tx+
7
SW 1
1
Compumotor
Connections – see pages 25 & 32
Configuring for RS-485 – see page 10
7
SW 1
1
APEX635
APEX640
Iso Gnd
7
SW 1
1
OFF
Set-up: 9600 baud, 8 data bits,1 stop bit,
no parity, full duplex. see page 25
7
1
2
1
8
Cos
COM 1
OFF
OFF
A
Off 1 SW1
• INPUTS or OUTPUTS not working:
Programmable input (INFNC) functions and drive
fault detection will not operate until you enable
input functions with the INFEN1 command.
Programmable output (OUTFNC) functions will not
operate unless enabled with OUTFEN1 command.
SW 1
1
APEX604
DIP Switch Settings
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 SW2
• PROBLEM REPORT: TAS command reports problems. TFS command reports Following status.
OFF
202 – 252 VAC
47 – 66 Hz
3-ph or 1-ph
(Use L1 & L2
for 1-ph)
pg 5, 23
PE
X6
1
8
• EXAMINE LEDs for indication of problem. pg 60
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 SW3
Control L2
L3
Earth
L2
L1
Earth
Control L1
8
D A N G E R
HIGH VOLTAGE
AC INPUT
L1
L2
L3
Earth
Earth
Control L1
Control L2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
• TO ALLOW MOTION:
– Power must be on. (Is at least one LED on?)
– ENABLE IN must be grounded.
– Connect (or disable) limits. LH (LHØ) command.
– Set (or disable) position error. SMPER (SMPERØ)
– Set reasonable gains for system. (see Tuning)
– Check encoder (TPE); increments for CW move?
– Check A, V, D. (If D = Ø, no motion will occur.)
V Bus +
Regen Res / N C
V Bus Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Motor Ground
Shield
See Reverse for APEX6151 Quick Reference
Color
Code
APEX
Motor
Cable
Orange
Blue
Gray
Green &
Shield
MT±
Flt Relay±
-----Red
Black
Green
Blue
Brown
White
Yellow
Orange
Short MT+ and MT- if motor
has no temperature sensor
pg 41
Relay type: Normally Open
Max Current: 5A at 24VDC or
5A at 120VAC
see page 42 for more info
see Motor Braking on pg 42-44
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement